System 2000.net V8&RXU v.3.0

System 2000.
net
User Guide
• V8 Multifunction Receiver
• RXU-3 Receiver
• RXU-TM Transmitter Monitor
Version 3.0 February 2006
PHOENIX GEOPHYSICS
System 2000.net
User Guide
• V8 Multifunction Receiver
• RXU-3 Receiver
• RXU-TM Transmitter Monitor
Version 3.0 February 2006
Printed in Canada on water resistant Xerox® Laser Never-Tear
paper.
This User Guide was created in Adobe FrameMaker 7.0.

Writing and Production: Stuart Rogers.
Copyright 2006 Phoenix Geophysics Limited.
All rights reserved. No part of this Guide may be reproduced or

transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying, recording, or information storage and
retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher.
Address requests for permission to:
Phoenix Geophysics Limited, 3781 Victoria Park Avenue, Unit 3,

Toronto, ON Canada M1W 3K5, or mail@phoenix-geophysics.com.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
V8 Multi-Function Receiver, V5 System 2000, System2000.net,

SSMT2000 and the Phoenix logo are trademarks of Phoenix
Geophysics Limited. All other trademarks referred to in this
document are the properties of their respective owners.
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
About System 2000.net™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Time series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
System applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Stacked waveforms and stack results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Phoenix System 2000.net advantages . . . . 7
Radio communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Electric and magnetic channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 How to get further information and
Table 1-1: System 2000.net configurations . . . . . . . . . . 5 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Data storage and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
i i
ii ii
Chapter 2: Quick Start Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Step 7: Set up the V8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Installing the PC software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Step 8: Check the acquisition
Step 1: Calibrate equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Step 2: Plan your survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Step 9: Start recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Step 3: Create and install startup files . . . 12 Step 10: Adjust for quality control . . . . . . .14
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Step 4: Transport equipment to Transmitter signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
the field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Standard deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Plotted curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Step 5: Set up the transmitter and Cycle completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
RXU-TM (controlled source methods) . . 12
Step 11: Move to the next site . . . . . . . . . . .15
Step 6: Set up remote instruments . . . . . . 13
Chapter 3: Common Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installing and connecting system Table 3-1: Error and warning LED indications . . . . . . . 39
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Satellite lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Handling locking-ring connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Clock status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Connecting electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Shared vs. separate electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Table 3-2: Clock status LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Separate electrodes for MT/AMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Instrument mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Installing porous pot electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 3-3: Instrument mode LED indications. . . . . . . . 42
Connecting the GPS antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Summary of complete sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Installing and connecting magnetic sensors. . . . . . . . . 25 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Installing an air-loop sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using the new indication sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Installing and removing the CompactFlash card . . . . . . 29
Formatting a CF card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Starting the V8 and navigating the user
Connecting the external battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Connecting the V8-EX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Starting and shutting down the V8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Changing the V8-EX internal battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 About controls, control areas, and “focus” . . . . . . . . . 47
Starting and shutting down an RXU . . . . . 35 Moving the focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Moving the focus in tab order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Understanding RXU LED indications . . . . . 35 Moving the focus in random order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Moving the focus within a control area . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Original indication sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
System startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Scrolling through lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Initial satellite lock . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Activating menu and button commands . . . . . . . . . . . 50
During data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Entering and changing values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
New indication sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Typing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
System startup and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Scrolling through lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Instrument status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Editing spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
iii iii
iv iv
Saving settings when closing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Low pass filter graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Saving and loading settings files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Setting the line frequency filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting coupling parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Entering survey information . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Customizing the V8 by setting options . . 67
Entering Box information and changing Customizing data and plot appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Understanding gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Checking instrument status . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 3-4: Channel gain factors and signal strength . . . 56 Calibrating the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Setting up instrument type, serial number, channels, Calibrating the V8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
and gains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Calibrating coil sensors (MTC-30/50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Channel terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Calibrating air-loop sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Understanding instrument modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Cancelling a calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Viewing calibration results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
CS Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Importing calibration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
CS Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
CS Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Saving data files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Coil Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Upgrading instrument capabilities . . . . . . 82
Box Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
GPS Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 PC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Pot Res Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Pot-Coil Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Ensuring quality data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Storage and handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting up remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting up filtering and coupling . . . . . . . . 60 Survey requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Setting the low pass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter 4: Table Files and TblEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
About table files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Creating and modifying table files . . . . . . 94
Startup table files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Opening and saving table files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Site table files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Editing acquisition parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Editing frequency stepping parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 96
About TblEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Editing coil and loop sensor calibration parameters . . . 97
Exploring TblEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Editing the current sensor parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Setting gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Starting TblEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Table 4-1: CMU-1 gain factors and signal strength. . . 100
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Editing communication settings . . . . . . . ....... . . 101
The File menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Using table files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . 102
The Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Editing Raw Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . 103
The Utilities menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
The View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Viewing and printing System 2000.net
The Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Converting table files to V5 System 2000
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
v v
vi vi
Chapter 5: RXUPilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

About Palm OS™ handheld devices . . . . . 108 Battery 1 . . . . ....................... . . . .122
Additional documentation and software. . . . . . . . . . . 108 Battery 2 . . . . ....................... . . . .122
Battery 3 . . . . ....................... . . . .122
Meazura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . 108
Temperature . . . ...................... . . . .122
Symbol SPT1800 . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . 109
GPS FPGA . . . . . ...................... . . . .122
Graffiti tutorial . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . 109
Front End FPGAs . ...................... . . . .122
Infrared port . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . 110
DSP Status: . . . ....................... . . . .122
About RXUPilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Disk Free Space . ...................... . . . .122
Launching RXUPilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Setting up radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Updating the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Viewing and changing RXU serial number . . . . . . . . . 114 Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Viewing location, GPS status, and clock status. . . . . . 114 Maximum Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Number of satellites acquired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Tx Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
UTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Network Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Latitude, longitude, and elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Clock error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Mstr Rng/Brng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Clock status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Master or Slave status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Controlling calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Using master bearing to aim directional antennas . . . 124
Viewing and changing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Monitoring radio network quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Accessing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Controlling data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Changing parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Viewing station statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Saving parameters (startup.tbl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Enabling continuous update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Loading saved parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Interpreting station statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Viewing instrument status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Scrolling through station statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
S/W Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Installing RXUPilot upgrades . . . . . . . . . . 129
Chapter 6: The RXU-3E Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
About the RXU-3E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Setting up radio communication . . . . . . . 135
Starting and shutting down the RXU-3E . . . . . . . . . . 132 Setting up the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Acquiring remote channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Calibrating the RXU-3E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Cancelling a calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Setting up local electric channels . . . . . . 138
Operating and monitoring the RXU-3E. . 139
vii vii
viii viii
Chapter 7: The RXU-TM Transmitter Monitor and CMU-1

Current Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
About the RXU-TM and CMU-1 . . . . . . . . . 142 Setting up the RXU-TM, current sensor,
Starting and shutting down the RXU-TM . . . . . . . . . . 142 and transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Calibrating the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Operating and monitoring the RXU-TM . 154
Calibrating the RXU-TM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Setting up frequency stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Calibrating the CMU-1 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Setting channel gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Cancelling a calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table 7-1: Gain factors and signal strength. . . . . . . . 156
Setting up radio communication . . . . . . . 150 Controlling data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Setting up the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Chapter 8: Radio Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
About System 2000.net radio . . . . . . . . . . 160 Receiver gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Receiver sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Radio Type (Master or Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Path loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Network address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Table 8-1: Path loss examples (2.4GHz). . . . . . . . . . 168
Unit address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Gain margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Encryption key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Increase system gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Decrease path loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Antennas and masts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Types of antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Setting up radio communication . . . . . . . 169
Aiming directional antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Assembling antenna tripods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Types of masts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Installing an omni-directional antenna on a tripod . . . 170
Communication content and schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Installing an omni-directional antenna on a mast. . . . 172
Factors affecting radio communication . 166 Installing a whip antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
System gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Operating the RXU radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Transmitter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Operating the V8 radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Transmitter gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Network initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ix ix
x x
Chapter 9: Frequency Stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

About System 2000.net frequency Activating a schedule file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Setting up the Auto Stepping frequency
Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Specifying non-pattern and pattern frequencies. . . . . 191
Table 9-1: Recommended frequencies for Selecting a frequency-stepping pattern . . . . . . . . . . 192
frequency domain operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Setting up the schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Automatic modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Setting up automatic current reduction (roll-off)
Table 9-2: Transmission codes and resulting for T-200 and TXU-30 transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Activating Auto Stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Creating a frequency schedule file . . . . . 186
Converting the schedule to binary format . . . . . . . . . 188
Examining a binary schedule file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Chapter 10: Spectral Induced Polarization (SIP) . . . . . 199
Using the SIP function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Setting up SIP acquisition parameters . 209
Array layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Setting up filtering and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting up frequency stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Setting up SIP survey and site
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Acquiring SIP data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Entering survey and instrument information . . . . . . . 202 Viewing channel results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Entering array layout information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Evaluating the data and correcting gain . . . . . . . . . . 213
Entering channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Changing location along the survey line . . . . . . . . . . 214
Calculating co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Modifying calculated co-ordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Completing SIP Site setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
xi xi
xii xii
Chapter 11: Controlled Source AMT (CSAMT) . . . . . . . 217

Using the CSAMT function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Setting up CSAMT acquisition
Array layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Setting up filtering and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Setting up CSAMT survey and site
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Entering survey and instrument information . . . . . . . 219 Acquiring CSAMT data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Entering array layout information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Viewing channel results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Entering channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Evaluating the data and adjusting gain . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Calculating co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Changing location along the survey line . . . . . . . . . . 228
Modifying calculated co-ordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Completing CSAMT site setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Chapter 12: Time Domain Electromagnetics
(TDEM, TEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Using the TDEM function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Entering channel information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Site layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Updating co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Polarity considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Modifying calculated co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Current source phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Completing TDEM site setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Transmitting loop orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Sensor orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Setting up TDEM acquisition
Latest detectable signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
TDEM apparent resistivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Setting up filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Table 12-1: Time of latest detectable signal (ms) . . . 235
Setting up sampling windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Depth of investigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Setting up automatic polarity correction . . . . . . . . . . 244
Setting up TDEM survey and site
Acquiring TDEM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Viewing channel results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Entering survey and instrument information . . . . . . . 236 Evaluating the data and adjusting gain . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Entering array layout information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Changing location along the survey line . . . . . . . . . . 247
Ramp length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tx Loop Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
xiii xiii
xiv xiv
Chapter 13: Magnetotellurics (MT) and

Audio-frequency MT (AMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
AMT and MT techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Start up and verify operation ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Duration of soundings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Protect the equipment. . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Complete the layout sheet . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Local, Remote, and Far Remote stations . . . . . . . . . . 251
Acquire data . . . . . . . . . .
..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Telluric vs. magnetic deployments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Retrieve the equipment. . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Steps in a typical survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Processing the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Exporting and interpreting the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Choose the sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Setting up a survey site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Allocate and schedule the equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Obtain permissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Verifying your location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Create a standard set of parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Choosing the site centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Calibrating the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Setting up telluric dipoles (E-lines) . . . . 267
Setting up the survey sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Connecting electrodes to the instrument. . . . . . . . . . 269
Form a 3-person crew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Keep records throughout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Measuring electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Conduct an inventory and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Setting up magnetic sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Verify the location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Determine the centre and place the instrument . . . . . . . 256 Choosing sensor locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Set up the telluric lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Installing coil sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Adjust for E-line difficulties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Connecting the sensors to the V8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Set up the magnetic sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Adjust for sensor difficulties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Setting up the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Measure and record electrode resistance and Powering up the instruments and acquiring data . . . . 275
dipole voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Retrieving the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Setting up MT/AMT acquisition
Shutting down the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Remeasuring electrical characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Frequency ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Collecting the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Combining instrument types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Setting up MT/AMT survey and site Table 13-1: MTU⁄MTU-A sampling rates (number of samples
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 per one-second record). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Entering survey information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Setting the Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Setting the North Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Setting up filtering and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Entering telluric channels information . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Setting gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Entering magnetic channels information . . . . . . . . . . 282 Table 13-2: Gain factors and signal strength . . . . . . . 287
Incrementing the station position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Setting acquisition times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Completing MT/AMT site setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Setting sampling parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Acquiring MT/AMT data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Monitoring MT/AMT acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Appendix A: Time Zone Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Appendix B: Magnetic Declination Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
xv xv
xvi xvi
Appendix C: V8 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Mechanical and environmental . . . . . . . . . 302
Processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Clocking and synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Related products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 RXU-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Data storage and transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 RXU-TM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
External connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 V8-EX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
MTU family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
MTU-A family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Electric channel inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
MTU-TXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Battery connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
CMU-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
GPS antenna connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
MTU-2ESD, MTU-5ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Radio antenna connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
MTU-2ES, MTU-5S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 MTU-5LR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
MTU-AI family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Appendix D: Sample Layout Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Obtaining a supply of Layout Sheets . . . 306 Table D-1: Layout Sheet part numbers. . . . . . . . . . . 306
Appendix E: Sample Equipment Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Appendix F: Meazura Quick Start Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
xvii xvii
xviii xviii
Chapter
This chapter provides general information on Phoenix
Geophysics and the System 2000.net family of
instruments, including:
• Phoenix V8 Multifunction Receiver
• Phoenix RXU-3E Controlled Source Receiver
• Phoenix RXU-TM Transmitter Monitor
• Geophysical applications
• Data processing
• Radio communication
• System advantages
• Support
Introduction
1 Chapter 1 1
2 Chapter 1 Introduction About System 2000.net™ 2
About System 2000.net™ The RXU-3E receivers use the same controlled source
acquisition and communication hardware and software
System 2000.net is a family of geophysical instruments as the V8, but do not have a display screen. They can
comprising the V8™ Multifunction Receiver, the be controlled and monitored using a handheld Palm
RXU-3E™ Controlled Source Receiver, and the RXU- OS® device.
TM™ Transmitter Monitor. Additional components
include the CMU-1™ Current Sensor, the MTC-50™ and The system builds upon many of the most attractive
AMTC-30™ magnetic sensors, and the V8-EX™ features of the highly successful Phoenix V5, V6A, and
expansion unit and battery pack. System 2000.net is V5 System 2000, including light weight and permanent
the eighth generation of receiver technology developed synchronization via Global Positioning System (GPS)
by Phoenix since 1975. satellites. The full-size ASCII keyboard and full-size,
full-colour, sunlight-readable display of the V8 give the
Each of the instruments is available in various operator hands-on control of the entire data acquisition
configurations and can optionally be equipped for process for all the most common IP and EM geophysical
wireless communication in the unlicensed Industrial, techniques.
Scientific, and Medical (ISM) frequency band.
When equipped with a V8-EX expansion unit, the V8
The V8 Multifunction Receiver is the heart of the can acquire a total of eight channels simultaneously—
system. It can acquire up to eight channels of data up to seven electric channels and/or three magnetic
itself, and can incorporate and display data from channels. The RXU-3E receivers can acquire two or
multiple RXU-3E two- or three-channel receivers and three electric channels.
an RXU-TM transmitter monitor as well. The V8 can
also remotely control the RXU instruments. System 2000.net instruments are synchronized to UTC
±0.2µs, and are optimized to operate with transmitters
similarly synchronized. The GPS synchronization and System applications
optional radio communication mean that no cable links
are required between the receivers and the transmitter. Geophysicists use System 2000.net for many industrial
and scientific applications. EM techniques are valuable
The receivers use the same circuit-board stack as the in exploration for:
world-leading V5 System 2000 MTU and MTU-A
• Oil and gas
receivers. The V8 produces the same time series
format for these techniques too, so both systems can • Diamonds (kimberlites)
be used together in the same survey. • Base and precious metals (as deep as 2000m)
• Groundwater
Phoenix Geophysics Ltd. gratefully acknowledges the • Geothermal reservoirs
support of the Government of Canada through the • Industrial minerals
National Research Council's Industrial Research
Assistance Program (NRC-IRAP). IRAP is Canada's ...and for monitoring, engineering, and pure research
premier innovation assistance program for small and applications.
medium-sized Canadian enterprises and is regarded
The following EM techniques are available or planned:
world-wide as one of the best programs of its kind.
Phoenix has received approximately CDN$100 000 • Induced Polarization (IP)
from the Industrial Research Assistance Program, and a • Controlled Source Audiofrequency Magnetotellurics
further CDN$90 000 in Government Research Tax (CSAMT)
Credits in support of the System 2000.net project. • Magnetotellurics (MT, AMT, V8 only)
• All common Time and Frequency Domain
Electromagnetics (TDEM, FDEM)
• Resistivity

The system will also be able to record or monitor time Electric and magnetic channels. The number of electric
series data from any suitable sensor, including (E) channels that can be measured varies from two to
geophones. seven. Electric channels can use two separate
electrodes (necessary for tensor measurements in MT
and AMT), or they can share electrodes (useful in linear
System configurations arrays for SIP and other techniques). The choice of
shared or separate electrodes has no effect on
System 2000.net components are highly flexible and
magnetic channels (if equipped).
can be configured in a number of different ways to suit
customer requirements. (See Table 1-1, “System The number of electric channels appears with the letter
2000.net configurations,” on page 5.) “E” after the hyphen in the model number, unless the
Radio communications. Any of the System 2000.net instrument also has magnetic channels.
instruments can be ordered with radio communications The V8 can optionally be fitted with the V8-EX
capability. An “R” appended to the model number expansion unit. The V8-EX houses a rechargeable
indicates that the instrument is equipped with the radio battery and provides eight additional binding posts and
feature. three multi-pin connectors for channel connections.
Radio communication between instruments allows the Future development will allow the use of
operator of the V8 to control remote RXU instruments multiconductor cable for electric channels with the V8.
and view real-time data from them. The receivers can
also incorporate statistics from other instruments (a When the V8-EX is not used, one of a series of jumper
transmitter monitor or remote noise reference, for boards can be installed instead. These jumper boards
instance) in their own calculations. reconfigure the internal wiring of the V8 to suit the
channel arrangement required.
Table 1-1: System 2000.net configurations
E channels H
Modela channels
Applications and Notes
Separate Mode Shared Mode
V8-3E, -3ER 2 3 — SIP. V8-EX not supported.
V8-3H, -3HR — — 3 MulTEM, LoTEM. Typically used with one magnetic sen-
sor.
V8-6, -6R 2 3 3 MT, AMT, CSAMT, MulTEM, LoTEM. V8-EX supported, but
not required.
V8-7E, -7ER 4 7 — Small-scale dipole-dipole IP. Requires V8-EX or multi-

conductor cable.
V8-8, -8R 4 7 3 Same as V8-7E, plus CSAMT.
RXU-3E, -3ER 2 3 — CSAMT, SIP.
RXU-3, -3R 2 — 1 Time Domain EM.
RXU-TM, -TMR — — — All controlled-source applications. Monitors, controls,

with CMU-1 stores, and reports transmitter parameters.
RXU-TC, -TCR — — — Transmitter controller for controlled-source applications

where current monitoring is not required.
a. An “R” appended to the model number indicates radio communication capability.

Data storage and processing The instruments acquire a “stacked waveform”
approximately every 10s (or at least one signal
System 2000.net instruments are equipped with period). From this, the instruments calculate an
removable CompactFlash™ cards (CF cards) as the estimate of several geophysical parameters (e.g.,
data storage medium. These small, re-usable cards can amplitude, phase, resistivity, chargeability). The
store up to 512MB of data. individual estimates are called “stack results”. Stack
results are saved on the CF card; stacked waveforms
If radio communication is established, the V8 can
can also be saved if desired. (At frequencies <0.1Hz,
process and include the data from RXU-3E instruments
this amounts to saving the time series.)
(including a remote noise reference station) and an
RXU-TM Transmitter Monitor. If radio communication is When a new stacked waveform is processed, the V8
absent or unreliable, the V8 displays only its own reprocesses all the accumulated stack results from the
results; however, all the instruments save their own same station. The result is an overall estimate of the
data for post-processing, regardless of the radio state. geophysical parameter and an estimate of its accuracy.
Time series. In MT and AMT surveys, the entire time If more than four stacked waveforms are available, the
V8 uses a robust calculation technique so that a small
series from each channel is stored on the CF card for
number of gross errors has a small effect on the
later transfer to a PC. Processing takes place on the PC.
statistics.
Stacked waveforms and stack results. In types of
surveys other than MT and AMT, processing occurs in If transmitter monitor data (from an RXU-TM) is not
real time and the V8 displays the results in graphical available, the V8 uses assumed values for current and
and/or numeric form. phase. If transmitter monitor data is available (even
delayed by up to five minutes), it is incorporated into
the calculations.
Phoenix System 2000.net The V8 equipment and software available today leads
the world in EM instrumentation. The low power, 24-bit
advantages acquisition units are small, lightweight, simple to
operate, and highly flexible. Far more data is collected
Phoenix Geophysics has been at the forefront of EM than ever before, providing the highest quality results.
system development since the introduction of the Phoenix products are the only receivers on the market
MT-16 in 1980, representing the third generation of MT that do not require cable connections among multiple
technology. instruments.
First-generation systems had appeared in the 1950s The field configuration and spacing of the instruments
when Cagniard in France and Tikhonov in Russia is completely flexible, to suit the requirements of the
developed the MT method and began using analog application. Because no cable links are required
instruments, processing their data largely by hand. between the instruments, System 2000.net has an
Second-generation equipment introduced in the mid- important advantage in areas with rugged topography,
1960s included minicomputers, tape recorders, and lakes, water courses, or other access difficulties. The
truck-mounted AC generators. Since Phoenix’s entry GPS synchronization means that sites even very
into the market, successive generations of equipment remote from the survey can be used to acquire
have added more and more sophisticated computing reference data, vastly improving the quality and
capability, increased numbers of channels and reliability of the survey results.
functions, battery power, remote reference capability,
and the locating and synchronizing functions of the
Global Positioning System. At the same time, Phoenix
has been able to continuously reduce both the capital
and operating costs associated with EM surveys.
7 Chapter 1 Introduction Phoenix System 2000.net advantages 7

8 Chapter 1 Introduction How to get further information and support 8
How to get further Telephone: +1 (416) 491-7340

Fax: +1 (416) 491-7378
information and support e-mail: mail@phoenix-geophysics.com
Web site: www.phoenix-geophysics.com
Contact us at:
Phoenix Geophysics Ltd.

3781 Victoria Park Avenue
Unit 3
Toronto, ON, Canada
M1W 3K5
Chapter
This chapter provides an outline of the general process
involved in conducting a survey with System 2000.net
equipment. It also serves as an aid to finding further
information within this User Guide.
Quick Start Reference
9 Chapter 2 9
10 Chapter 2 Quick Start Before you begin 10
Before you begin Installing the PC software

Use the following sections to determine which software
To familiarize yourself with System 2000.net, you
should read several other sections of this User Guide: programs you need. To install the software, open the
corresponding folder on the Phoenix software CD-ROM
To learn about: See page: and double-click the Setup.exe file. Follow the on-
screen instructions.
The user interface and operations com- 17
mon to all methods and equipment For this requirement: Install this software:
The RXU-3E 131 All systems TblEdit and V8Sim
The RXU-TM 141 CSAMT CMT Pro
Controlling RXUs with a handheld device 107 SIP SIP Pro
Radio networking 159 TDEM TEM Pro
Install the necessary Phoenix software on your PC MT and AMT SSMT2000*

before continuing. Several programs are provided on *SSMT2000 is supplied on a separate CD-ROM
the CD-ROMs supplied with your system. You need to
install the startup table editing program and the
visualization and post-processing software associated
with the geophysical method(s) for which you
purchased a licence.
Step 1: Calibrate equipment Step 2: Plan your survey
All instruments and sensors (current monitors and Determine the geophysical method and the layout
induction coils or loops) must be calibrated before use. parameters (e.g., electrode spacing) that you will use
Calibration also serves to verify that the instruments in your survey. Read the chapter on the geophysical
and sensors are working properly. method to learn about layouts, arrays, site parameters,
and acquisition parameters; read Chapter 9,
Instructions for calibrating can be found in this Guide at
“Frequency Stepping” on page 177, to learn how to set
these locations: up controlled source frequencies:
To calibrate this equipment: See page:
To learn about: See page:
V8 72
SIP 199
RXU-3E 132
CSAMT 217
RXU-TM 143
TDEM 231
CMU-1 current monitor 145
MT, AMT 249
MTC-50, AMTC-30 sensor 74
Controlled Source Frequency Stepping 177
AL-100 air-loop sensor 77
11 Chapter 2 Quick Start Calibrate equipment 11

12 Chapter 2 Quick Start Create and install startup files 12
Step 3: Create and install Step 4: Transport equipment

startup files to the field
If a table file named “startup.tbl” is present on the Use the sample equipment checklist in Appendix E on
CompactFlash card when an instrument is powered on, page 309 as a model to create your own checklist.
the settings in that file will be loaded into memory Gather your instruments, tools, and other equipment
automatically. This feature makes it easy to program a and transport them to the field.
number of instruments with identical settings and also
allows acquisition by an RXU to begin automatically.
(The V8 will not begin acquiring automatically,
regardless of the setting in the file.) Step 5: Set up the transmitter
For instructions on creating startup.tbl files, see
and RXU-TM (controlled
Chapter 4, “Table Files and TblEdit” on page 87. Create source methods)
the startup files and copy them to the CompactFlash
cards you will be using. Install the cards in the If you are using any of the controlled source methods,
instruments. set up the RXU-TM and your transmitter and its power
source:
For instructions on setting up the RXU-TM, see Chapter

7, “The RXU-TM Transmitter Monitor and CMU-1
Current Sensor” on page 141.
For instructions on using Phoenix transmitters and
motor generators, refer to the User Guides provided
Step 6: Set up remote
with that equipment. instruments
Power up the RXU-TM and wait for it to acquire GPS If you are using both RXU and V8 instruments, set up
lock. the RXU instruments and power them on. Make sure
they have been calibrated and have GPS lock.
Start up the transmitter and adjust the output as
required. For instructions on setting up an RXU, see Chapter 6,
“The RXU-3E Receiver” on page 131.
Use RXUPilot to verify that the frequency and output
current displayed by the transmitter gauges match the For instructions on setting up radio communication, see
frequency and current monitored by the RXU-TM. Chapter 8, “Radio Communication” on page 159.
Note The CMU-1 current monitor measures current at a part

of the waveform different from where it is measured
by the transmitter itself. The RXU-TM will normally
report a value that is 10% to 20% lower than the
Step 7: Set up the V8
transmitter gauge. Set up the V8 and power it on. Make sure it is
calibrated and has GPS lock.
Open the Site Setup dialog box for the geophysical

method you are using and complete the setup
information:
13 Chapter 2 Quick Start Set up remote instruments 13

14 Chapter 2 Quick Start Check the acquisition parameters 14
To learn about: See page: Step 9: Start recording
SIP site setup 202 Select the Start Recording command on the
CSAMT site setup 219 instrument(s). If you are using a radio network and
have selected Remote Control from the V8, all
TDEM site setup 235
instruments on the network will start recording within a
MT, AMT site setup 279 few seconds.
If you are using radio communication, check the

network status: the Update cells in the Box
spreadsheet should be highlighted in red. Step 10: Adjust for quality
control
Examine the real-time results of the acquisition and
Step 8: Check the acquisition make adjustments as necessary.
parameters Gain. Check the status bar and/or the signal strength
bar charts to see if saturations are occurring, and
Close the Site Setup dialog box and open the
reduce the gain on affected channels. In TDEM, the
Acquisition Parameters dialog box. Check that the
blue bars should reach no more than 40% of full scale;
settings (especially the frequency table in controlled
the green bars may reach 100% of full scale, especially
source methods) are correct.
in early time windows. In other controlled source
methods, the green bars should reach no more than
40% of full scale.
Transmitter signal. In controlled source methods elapsed, the curve on the plots will be complete, and
(other than CSAMT), evaluate the transmitter signal. the status bar will again display frequencies from the
Phase should be close to zero and the current should beginning of the table.
be uniform across the frequency spectrum (except
If the plotted curves are not satisfactory, you should
perhaps in the highest frequencies where current
strength may fall off). record more than one complete cycle of the frequency
table.
In CSAMT, the transmitter is generally too far away
from the receiver for effective monitoring.
Standard deviation. Evaluate the standard deviation of
signal amplitude: it should be no more than about 1%
Step 11: Move to the next site
(5% for CSAMT). Evaluate the standard deviation of When results are satisfactory at the first site, stop
phase: it should be no more than about 10 milliradians recording by putting the instrument in Standby mode
(5 degrees for CSAMT). or by saving the Setup.tbl file and choosing the
Shutdown command.
Local conditions may sometimes prevent these levels
from being reached. Move the equipment to the next site in the survey plan.
Plotted curves. Evaluate the plotted curves, which Return to the Site Setup dialog box and either enter
should be smooth. Error bars should be relatively new co-ordinates or use the Next Site command to
small. have the V8 automatically calculate co-ordinates.
Cycle completion. In controlled source methods, wait Repeat the sequence of recording data and adjusting
until a full cycle of the frequency table has been for quality control.
completed. The total time of the table will have
15 Chapter 2 Quick Start Move to the next site 15

16 Chapter 2 Quick Start Move to the next site 16
Chapter
This chapter contains task-oriented procedures for field
operations that are common to most geophysical
techniques.
Instructions are provided for:

• Making equipment connections
• Navigating the V8 user interface
• Calibrating the equipment
• Customizing the V8
• Ensuring quality data
Common Operations
17 Chapter 3 17
18 Chapter 3 Common Operations Installing and connecting system components 18
Installing and connecting Connection of radio antennas is described in Chapter 8,

Radio Communication.
system components
Warning To prevent damage to the instrument, always
This section describes how to connect the various connect the ground electrode to the GND terminal
components of System 2000.net. Some components ! first, before making any other connections. See
are required for every setup; some are optional or “Connecting electrodes” on page 20.
depend on the equipment configuration.
All instruments require these connections: Handling locking-ring connectors

• Ground electrode
• GPS antenna Many connections are made with military-grade
• Battery (unless the battery is contained in the cylindrical bayonet-lock connectors equipped with
V8-EX expansion unit) protective caps or locking rings. Most of these caps can
be joined together in pairs to keep them clean while
In addition, instruments may require these the equipment is in use.
connections:
• E-channel electrodes
• H-channel magnetic sensors
• Short-range, long-range, or directional radio
antenna
Fig. 3-1: Military-grade cylindrical connector and cap.
• V8-EX expansion unit (V8 only)
• Jumper board (V8 only)
The GPS antenna and battery connections are made To disconnect a cable:
with similar but smaller locking connectors; the • Push the locking ring toward the connection and
instrument terminals have caps, but the cable ends do turn the ring counterclockwise.
not.
Fig. 3-2: GPS and Battery connectors.
To remove a protective cap:

• On an instrument or a magnetic sensor, push on the
cap and turn it counterclockwise.
• On a cable end, hold the cap in one hand and with
the other hand, push the locking ring toward the
cap and turn the ring counterclockwise.
To make cable connections: Fig. 3-3: Cables joined with military-grade cylindrical connectors and
connector caps joined for protection from dirt.
• Fit the cable end to the receiving connector and
turn the locking ring clockwise until it locks in place.

To keep connectors clean: Connecting electrodes
1. When a connection is made, always join the two
loose protective caps and lock them to each other. For MT and AMT surveys, buried porous pot electrodes
(See Fig. 3-3 and 3-4.) should be used. For other survey techniques, metal
rods driven into the ground or porous pot electrodes in
2. When disconnecting equipment, always replace the
shallow holes can be used. If porous pot electrodes are
protective caps immediately and lock them in place.
used, they should be bedded in a salty mud mixture to
reduce contact resistance.
It is important that the instrument be grounded before

any other connections are made, and that all electrodes
have the lowest contact resistance possible.
Shared vs. separate electrodes. A single electrode can
be shared by two channels on the same instrument.
Sharing is typical in controlled source techniques, and
is the default configuration of the V8 and RXU-3E. A
channel is measured across each pair of adjacent
binding posts.
Note A single electrode can not be shared by two

instruments. If an electrode station must be used by
two instruments, install two electrodes, separated by
at least 1m. Less separation will result in crosstalk and
Fig. 3-4: Sensor connector caps joined for protection before burial. phase errors.
The receiver terminals are marked 1, 2, 3 (shared
mode) or 1, 2 (separate mode), and GND. West
East
South
Separate electrodes for MT/AMT. Separate mode is North
typical in MT/AMT surveys where two orthogonal
dipoles are used. In this case, channel 1 is the North-
South dipole, and channel 2 is the East-West dipole.
North East
South West
Fig. 3-6: RXU terminal connections for MT/AMT.
To connect electrodes for MT/AMT:

1. Connect the four E-lines to their appropriate
terminals:
• North electrode to channel 1 red terminal
Fig. 3-5: V8 terminal connections for MT/AMT. • South electrode to channel 1 black terminal
• East electrode to channel 2 red terminal
• West electrode to channel 2 black terminal
2. Double check the connections.

Warning To prevent damage to the instrument, always

4. Thread the twisted strands of the cable through the
connect the ground electrode to the GND terminal hole in the shaft of the terminal and wrap the free
! first, before making any other connections. end clockwise around the shaft. If your cable is very
thick, you may have to cut some of the strands at
the insulation in order to fit the wire through the
To connect a cable to the instrument:
hole in the shaft.
1. If necessary, remove 2–2.5cm of insulation from
the end of the cable, and twist the strands tightly
together.
2. Wrap the exposed end of the coaxial shield with two
or three layers of electrician’s tape.
Fig. 3-8: Cable threaded through the instrument terminal shaft.

Wrap the free end around the shaft before tightening the
terminal.
5. Tighten the binding post nut securely.
Fig. 3-7: An electrode cable stripped and wrapped with

6. Make sure that there are no loose strands that
electrician’s tape. could touch other wires or the instrument case.
3. Unscrew the binding post nut on the instrument

until it stops. (The nuts cannot be removed.)
Installing porous pot electrodes 2. Loosen the dirt at the bottom of the hole, or replace
a bit of the loose dirt just removed.
Figure 3-9 shows a porous pot electrode installed for 3. Pour in at least 1L of salt water and mix it with the
long-term soundings. For short soundings, the loose dirt to form a uniform mud. In porous or sandy soil
dirt cover is not required. The cable from the electrode and in hot weather, you may need to use more salt
to the instrument is called an E-line. water—enough to keep the electrode damp for the
Have a quantity of salt water (50g/L) prepared. duration of the sounding.
4. Place the electrode upright in the hole, rotating it
electrode cable spliced to E-line back and forth to position it solidly in the mud,
and wrapped with electrical tape leaving the electrode cable extended outside the
hole.
5. For long-term soundings (e.g., MT, AMT), cover the
loose dirt to cover
electrode (MT, AMT) electrode completely by filling the hole with loose
~15–45 cm
dirt.
salty mud 6. Connect the electrode cable to the instrument GND
~20–50cm mixture terminal or to the E-line cable, as described in the
next section.
Fig. 3-9: Electrode installation.

To connect E-lines to the electrodes:
To install an electrode: 1. Remove 2–2.5cm of insulation from the ends of the
cables.
1. Dig a small hole about 20–50cm deep, removing
any sizeable rocks.

2. Hold the E-line and the electrode cable side by side Connecting the GPS antenna
with the ends pointing in the same direction.
3. Divide the strands of the electrode cable in half, The global positioning system (GPS) antenna must
twist one half tightly around the bare end of the E- always be connected to the V8, RXU, and RXU-TXM
line, and then twist the remaining half over top of when operating or calibrating the equipment, because
the first half. This assures a good electrical the satellites provide the necessary time signals. The
connection. cable has two connectors: one with slots for quick
connection to the instrument, and one with threads for
4. Wrap the joined wires with two or three layers of
connection to the antenna.
electrician’s tape.
5. Tie an overhand knot near the splice, treating the
two cables as if they were one. (The splice can
remain connected for the duration of the survey.
The knot prevents the splice from being pulled
to GPS
apart when the electrodes are moved.) antenna
Tip Other than in monitoring applications, cable splices will

be temporary—they’ll have to be separated when you
retrieve the equipment after the last sounding. To save
to instrument
time, when you wrap a splice, always leave the free end
of the electrician’s tape doubled back or twisted onto
itself. When you retrieve the equipment, the loose end Fig. 3-10: GPS antenna cable connectors.
of tape will be easy to grasp and unwrap, even when
wearing gloves.
To connect the GPS antenna: connectors” on page 18 when making these
1. Screw the threaded connector of the antenna cable connections.
to the underside of the antenna head. (See
If using a 3-way cable, be sure that each sensor is
Fig. 3-10 on page 24.) connected to the correct pigtail. The cable is marked
2. Fit the slotted connector to the GPS ANT connector on with one ring for Hx, two rings for Hy, and three rings
the instrument as described on page 19. for Hz. (See Fig. 3-11.)
3. Open the antenna tripod and position the GPS
antenna so that it is level, stable, and has Connect the single-connector end of the 3-way cable to
unobstructed sight lines to as much of the sky as the AUXILIARY terminal on the V8.
possible. If necessary, tape the antenna tripod to
Hz
another object (e.g., a stake, post, or larger tripod)
so that it is raised above tall grass or shrubs.
to V8
Hy
Installing and connecting magnetic
sensors Hx
Magnetic sensors can be connected individually to the

three multi-pin connectors on the V8-EX. Alternatively, Fig. 3-11: Three-way sensor connector cable.
they can be connected using a 3-way cable that
connects to the AUXILIARY connector on the V8 itself. For best results, sensors should be buried in a shallow
Follow the instructions for “Handling locking-ring trench in order to minimize vibration-induced noise.

Correct identification, careful levelling, and accurate 2. If you are keeping track of equipment deployment,
orientation are crucial to obtain good sensor data. then also record the identifying number of the
sensor cable to be used.
Tip To identify the sensor cables, tie a loose single overhand
3. Gather up:
knot about 40cm from the end of the Hx cable before
connecting it to the V8. Tie two overhand knots in the • the sensor
Hy cable, and three in the Hz cable. With this method, • one end of the sensor cable
even if the lines become disorganized around the V8, it
• a shovel
will be easy to verify that the cables are connected to
the correct terminals. • a spirit level
Be sure that no metal objects such as belt buckles, • a handheld compass
vehicles, or shovels are close enough to distort compass 4. Carry the equipment to the location chosen for that
readings.
sensor, pulling the sensor cable as you go.
If you tie a short piece of rope around the coil before
5. Lay the sensor on the ground and use the compass
burying it, you’ll be able to pull the coil free of the
ground more easily when retrieving the equipment. to orient it reasonably accurately. Be certain that
Never try to free a coil by pulling on the cable; the the free end is to the (nominal) north for Hx, or to
connector may break. the (nominal) east for Hy.
To position and orient a horizontal coil sensor:

1. Designate the sensor as Hx or Hy and record its
serial number on the Layout Sheet.
Tip To orient a coil easily, open the handheld compass fully
4. Lay the sensor in the trench in the correct orien-
and rotate the housing to the desired azimuth. Then tation, using the spirit level to place it as accurately
hold it at waist level directly over the coil and align the level as possible. You may have to deepen or fill in
compass North marking with the needle. Sight past the part of the trench to do this.
long edge of the compass to the side of the coil to judge
its alignment.
5. Use the compass to orient the sensor as accurately
as possible.
Align coil with compass edge
Note If you adjust the sensor in any direction, always
recheck the accuracy of both orientation and level.
Adjust the coil as necessary until it lines up perfectly

with the long edge of the compass. 6. Taking care not to disturb the sensor, replace the
soil in the trench and pack it down gently. (Do not
mound the soil over the coil, or you will increase
To bury a horizontal coil sensor: wind noise.)
1. Use a shovel to mark the outline of a trench about 7. If there is excess cable, lay it out in S-shapes. In
10–15cm beyond each end of the oriented sensor windy areas, weight down the cables with rocks or
and the same distance from each side. dirt every metre or so as you return to the site
2. Move the sensor aside and dig the trench about centre.
40cm deep, keeping the bottom smooth and level
and piling the soil alongside the trench. To install a vertical coil sensor:
3. Connect the cable to the sensor. 1. On the Layout Sheet, record the Hz coil serial
number.

2. If you are keeping track of equipment deployment, 9. Taking care not to disturb the coil, replace the
then also record the identifying number of the remaining soil. If necessary, build a gently-sloping
sensor cable. mound of additional soil over the top until the coil is
3. Gather up: completely buried.
• the sensor 10. If there is excess cable, lay it out in S-shapes. In
windy areas, weight down the cables with rocks or
• one end of the sensor cable
dirt every metre or so as you return to the site
• a shovel centre.
• a post-hole digger or an auger
• a spirit level
Installing an air-loop sensor
4. Carry the equipment to the location chosen for the
sensor, pulling the cable as you go. If the ground is too rocky to allow burial of a vertical
5. Dig a narrow hole deep enough to completely bury coil, use an air-loop as the Hz sensor instead.
the sensor. If this is too difficult, dig as deeply as
possible and plan to mound additional soil over the To install an air-loop sensor:
top of the coil. 1. On the Layout Sheet, record the Hz air-loop serial
6. Connect the cable to the sensor. number.
7. Place the sensor in the hole and steady it by 2. If you are keeping track of equipment deployment,
replacing about half the excavated soil. then also record the identifying number of the
8. Use the spirit level to position the coil vertically as sensor cable.
accurately as possible, measuring at two places at 3. Gather up:
right angles to each other on the side of the coil.
• the sensor bance by humans or animals, consider burying the
• one end of the sensor cable air-loop completely.
• a tape measure
4. Carry the equipment to the location chosen for the Installing and removing the
sensor, pulling the cable as you go.
CompactFlash card
5. Arrange the air-loop flat on the ground so that:
• The air-loop forms a perfect square (opposite The instruments store their parameters and data on a
corners should be 8.8m apart). CompactFlash (CF) card. The CF card fits into a slot in
the front of the RXU or the side of the V8, protected by
• The pre-amplifier is at one corner of the square.
a small watertight cover. If you try to operate the
• The cable to the V8 exits the pre-amplifier toward instrument without a CF card installed, the V8 Status
the right when viewed from within the air-loop. bar will display an error message. The LED of an RXU
will flash an error code.
CF cards are expensive and contain your valuable data.

Protect them from damage by storing them in plastic or
Hz 8.8m fabric cases when they are not in use.
Warning Never insert or remove a CompactFlash card when

Fig. 3-12: Air-loop cable must exit the pre-amplifier toward the the instrument is powered! Serious damage to the
right when viewed from within the air-loop. ! unit may result.
6. Weight down the air-loop and its cable with rocks or

dirt every metre or so. If there is a risk of distur-

To insert the CompactFlash card:
1. Ensure that the instrument is powered off.
2. Hold the CompactFlash card by the bottom corners,
with the front of the card facing the hole for the slot
cover lock. See Figs. 3-14 and 3-15 on page 30.
3. Slide the card gently into the slot and press it into
place.
Fig. 3-13: CompactFlash cards in protective case.
To access the CompactFlash card slot:

1. Locate the card slot on the front of the RXU or the
side of the V8. If the instrument is inside its canvas
case, you many have to peel back the flap that
covers the card slot.
2. Unlock the card slot cover by lifting the ring on the
handle and turning it 90° counterclockwise.
3. Lift the slot cover away from the instrument.
Fig. 3-14: Inserting the CompactFlash card in the V8.
Fig. 3-15: Inserting the CompactFlash card in the RXU.
To remove the CompactFlash card:

1. Ensure that the instrument is powered off.
2. Eject the card partially by pressing the small square
button beside it. (See Fig. 3-16 on page 31.)
3. Hold the card by the two corners and withdraw it
from the slot.
Fig. 3-16: CompactFlash card eject button.

To replace the card slot cover: Note The formatting utility provided by SanDisk corporation
1. Align the ring of the slot cover at right angles to the is not compatible with Phoenix instruments.
length of the cover. CompactFlash cards must use the FAT or FAT16 file
system applied by the Windows formatting utility. Do
2. Place the bevelled edge of the cover against the not format as FAT32 or NTFS.
instrument case and push the cover handle fully
If you experience PC system crashes when inserting a
into the case.
CompactFlash card into the reader, the problem may
3. Turn the cover handle one-quarter turn clockwise to be caused by static electricity. Touch a grounded
lock. object such as an unpainted area of the computer case
before inserting the card.
Warning Never operate the instrument without a
CompactFlash card installed and the card slot To format a CompactFlash card:
! cover locked in place.
1. Insert the card into a card reader connected to the
PC.
Formatting a CF card 2. Double click My Computer.
3. Right-click the CompactFlash card drive letter and
CompactFlash cards must be correctly formatted before click Format…
use.
4. If your operating system is Windows XP, be sure
that the File system is set to FAT. (In earlier
Windows versions, the file system is always FAT.)
5. If desired, type a volume label (a name for the
disk).
6. If Quick Format is selected, clear the checkbox. For long-term soundings, a special cable is available
7. Click Start. that allows two batteries to be connected in parallel.
This cable can also be used to replace a battery without
When formatting is complete (it takes only a few turning the instrument off.
seconds), click Close. The card is ready for use in
Phoenix instruments. Note Make all other connections, and always a ground
connection, before connecting a battery to the
instrument.
Connecting the external battery
To connect a BTU-type battery:
Each instrument is powered by a 12V DC battery, which
should be fully charged prior to use. (Follow the 1. Examine the battery terminals and clean off any
instructions provided on the Battery Charging Quick corrosion that might prevent a good electrical
Reference Guide.) RXU instruments use an external connection. (Use sandpaper, emery cloth, or a knife
battery; the V8 can use an external battery or the blade to carefully clean the terminals.)
V8-EX with an internal battery. 2. If the cable ends are not bolted to the battery
terminals, attach the alligator clamps to the
If you are providing your own batteries, ensure that terminals (red clamp to the positive [+] terminal,
they have the capacity to power an instrument for your black clamp to the negative [–] terminal). Ensure
planned acquisition durations. that the connection is secure and of correct
Newer Phoenix BTU-type (gel) batteries are shipped polarity.
with the cable ends bolted to the battery terminals;
older batteries were shipped with the cable unattached.

Tip On batteries with spade terminals, attach the alligator

4. Align the three guide pins and the threaded shaft
clamps so that they grip the edges rather than the flat on the V8-EX with the matching holes on the side of
surfaces of the terminals. The greater tension from the the V8.
clamp springs helps ensure a good connection. 5. Turn the knob on the side of the V8-EX clockwise
3. Fit the slotted connector to the EXT BATT terminal on until the V8-EX is firmly screwed to the V8.
the instrument as described on page 18.
To disconnect the V8-EX:
1. Ensure the V8 is powered off.
Connecting the V8-EX 2. Turn the knob on the side of the V8-EX fully
The V8-EX expansion unit provides eight additional counterclockwise until the V8 separates from
binding posts, three multi-pin connectors, and V8-EX.
optionally an internal battery. The V8-EX attaches to 3. Replace the protective covers on the connectors of
the V8 on the side opposite the CF card slot. both the V8 and V8-EX.
To connect the V8-EX:

1. Ensure the V8 is powered off.
Changing the V8-EX internal battery
2. Remove the protective cover from the side of the The V8-EX can house an optional lithium-ion battery,
V8. making the V8 and battery combination more easily
3. Remove the protective cover from the connector on portable.
the V8-EX.
To change the V8-EX battery: To shut down an RXU:
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to fully loosen the two • Press the POWER switch down (toward the POWER
stainless steel screws on the bottom of the V8-EX. label) and release it.
(The screws cannot be removed.)
The LED will light steadily, then go out when shutdown is
2. Lift up the triangular wire handle and pull the complete.
battery pack out of the V8-EX.
3. Insert the replacement fully-charged battery and Warning Disconnecting the battery before shutting down
the RXU may result in damage to equipment or
tighten the two stainless steel screws. ! loss of data. Always wait for the LED indicator to
go out before disconnecting the battery.
Starting and shutting down an

RXU Understanding RXU LED
To start an RXU:
indications
• Press the red POWER switch on the top of the The LED between the two centre electrode terminals
instrument to the ON position and release it. (see Fig. 3-17 on page 36) provides an indication of
the RXU status. There are two possible coded
After a short delay, the red LED between the N and S terminals sequences for the flashing patterns of the LED. Early
will flash, then light steadily for about 30s.
models of RXU use a sequence similar to that of
Phoenix System 2000 MTU receivers. Later models use
35 Chapter 3 Common Operations Starting and shutting down an RXU 35

36 Chapter 3 Common Operations Understanding RXU LED indications 36
a new sequence that provides more information to the Initial satellite lock. To synchronize with UTC and begin
operator. data acquisition, transmitter control, or calibration, the
RXU must receive signals from at least four GPS
satellites. (The instrument may actually acquire up to
eight satellites, but only indicates the first four.) Under
normal conditions, satellite lock takes less than 10min.
A longer delay may indicate poor antenna positioning
or a faulty antenna or cable.
Fig. 3-17: Instrument LED indicator.
• Before acquisition, the LED pattern is 1s on, 1s off,
for each satellite acquired, for up to four satellites.
Original indication sequence
In models with early firmware, for most indications the | | | | |…
LED flashes in a sequence that repeats every 12s. This seconds
sequence combines information about the number of Fig. 3-18: Before data acquisition, one satellite acquired.
satellites acquired and the status of the instrument
(standing by, recording, idling after recording).
System startup. | | | | | | | | | | | | |
seconds
• During system startup, the LED flashes once, then
again, then lights steadily for about 30s. This Fig. 3-19: Before data acquisition, two satellites acquired.
pattern is the same as in the early firmware and in
System 2000 MTUs.
each satellite acquired, to a maximum of four
| | | | | | | | | | | | | satellites.
seconds
Fig. 3-20: Before data acquisition, three satellites acquired.

| | | | | | | | | | | |
seconds
Fig. 3-22: During MT/AMT acquisition, one satellite acquired.

| | | | | | | | | | | | |2
seconds
Fig. 3-21: Before data acquisition, satellite lock achieved (four or

| | | | | | | | | | | |
more satellites acquired).
|seconds
During data acquisition. The RXU can acquire site or Fig. 3-23: During MT/AMT acquisition, two satellites acquired.
calibration data any time after the initial four-satellite
lock has been achieved. It is not necessary for satellite
lock to continue uninterrupted, because the RXU | | | | | | | | | | | |
internal clock stays synchronized with UTC for several seconds
hours even if satellite lock is temporarily lost. Fig. 3-24: During MT/AMT acquisition, three satellites acquired.
• During Controlled Source acquisition, the LED
pattern is the same as before acquisition (as just
described). | | | | | | | | | | | | |
• During MT or AMT data acquisition, the LED flashes seconds
in a pattern of one second on, two seconds off, for Fig. 3-25: During MT/AMT acquisition, four or more satellites
acquired.

Tip You can learn the exact number of acquired satellites by

Seven seconds are used to indicate the status of the
checking the GPS window of the RXUPilot program. Or, if instrument, including warning and error messages. Two
the instruments are on a radio network with a V8, you seconds are used to indicate the status of satellite lock.
can check the Options dialog box on the V8. The The satellite indication is always aligned with UTC
number of satellites may vary from 0 to 8. seconds :00, :15, :30, and :45. Two seconds are used
to indicate the status of the on-board clock, and four
After data acquisition. The RXU can be programmed to
seconds are used to indicate the instrument mode.
continue operating at idle or to shut down at the end of
site data acquisition. It will idle after calibration data System startup and shutdown.
acquisition. • During system startup, the LED flashes once, then
• If the RXU shuts down, the LED will go out. again, then lights steadily for about 30s. This
• If the RXU is idling, the LED will flash in a pattern of pattern is the same as in the early firmware and in
one second on, 5 seconds off. System 2000 MTUs.
• During system , the LED lights steadily until
shutdown is complete. Do not disconnect battery
| | | | | | | | | | | | | power until the LED goes out.
seconds
Instrument status. Seven seconds of the sequence are
Fig. 3-26: Idling after site or calibration data acquisition.
used to indicate either that the instrument is
performing normally or that there is an error or a
New indication sequence potential error, such as overheating or low battery
voltage.
In models with later firmware, for most indications the
LED flashes in a sequence that repeats every 15s.
• If the instrument is performing normally, the LED is Table 3-1: Error and warning LED indications
off for one second, then lights steadily for 5
Message
seconds, then goes off for one second. Flashes Meaning
type
1 Warning Battery voltage is less than 11V.

normal operation satellites and clock
2 Error CompactFlash card is not installed.
3 Warning Instrument internal temperature

| | | | | | | | | | | |
exceeds 60°C.
seconds
4 Warning Instrument is in record mode but
Fig. 3-27: Indication of normal operation.
disk space is <50MB (AMT),
<10MB (MT), or <2MB.
• If an abnormal condition exists, the LED will flicker The 50MB and 10MB warnings
rapidly for 350ms as an alert, and will then flash appear for 5 minutes only. The 2MB
from one to seven times, 50ms on, 350ms off (see warning is continuous.
Fig. 3-28). Table 3-1 explains the meaning of the
5 Warning The number of saturated records
number of flashes. has increased.
6 — Reserved for future use.

warnings/
alert satellites and clock
errors 7 Error Calibration failed.
8–14 — Reserved for future use.

| | | | | | | | | | | | |
seconds
Fig. 3-28: Pattern of flashes indicating errors and warnings.

System error. In some circumstances, the instrument • After the 7-second instrument status indication, the
may not be able to start up normally. This problem can LED pattern is 250ms on, 250ms off, for each
be caused by damaged circuit boards or corrupt satellite acquired, for up to four satellites (see
firmware files, for example. Fig. 3-30). If no satellites have been acquired, the
• In the case of a fatal system error, the LED flashes pattern is 1.9s on, 0.1s off (see Fig. 3-31).
constantly, 100ms on, 100ms off (see Fig. 3-29).
normal operation satellites

…
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
seconds
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
Fig. 3-29: Pattern of flashes indicating system error. seconds
If the instrument displays this indication, contact

UTC HH:MM:00, :15, :30, or :45
Phoenix technical support.
Fig. 3-30: Pattern of flashes indicating four (or more) satellites
Satellite lock. To synchronize with UTC and begin data
acquired.
acquisition, transmitter control, or calibration, the RXU
must receive signals from at least four GPS satellites.
(The instrument may actually acquire up to eight
normal operation satellites
satellites, but only indicates the first four.) Under
normal conditions, satellite lock takes less than 10min.
A longer delay may indicate poor antenna positioning | | | | | | | | | | | | |
or a faulty antenna or cable. seconds
Fig. 3-31: A single long flash indicates zero satellites acquired.

Clock status. Once the instrument acquires the Table 3-2: Clock status LED indications
minimum number of satellites, the on-board clock
Flashes Meaning
synchronizes to GPS time. Within the following
12.5min, the satellites send a correction message and 0 Clock is not yet initialized.
the on-board clock synchronizes to UTC. (The
1 Clock is synchronized to CPU real-time clock.
difference between GPS time and UTC is the number of
UTC leap seconds, which are not incorporated in GPS 2 GPS synchronization is in progress.
time.) If satellite lock is subsequently lost, accurate 3 Clock is synchronized to OCXO.
time is maintained by an oven-controlled crystal
oscillator (OCXO). Recording of site data or calibration 4 Clock is synchronized to GPS or UTC.
data cannot begin unless the clock is synchronized to
either satellites or OCXO. A complete pattern of eight equally spaced flashes
indicates both satellite lock and clock synchronization
• After the satellite indication, the LED pattern is
to GPS or UTC. The RXU is ready to record site data or
250ms on, 250ms off, from zero to four times (see
calibration data.
Fig. 3-32). Table 3-2 explains the meaning of the
number of flashes. Instrument mode. The next four seconds of the
sequence indicate whether or not the instrument is
recording (either site data or calibration data). The
normal operation satellites clock possible instrument modes are: setup, standby,
recording (site data or calibration data), or idling after
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
recording.
seconds • In these four seconds of the sequence, the LED
Fig. 3-32: Pattern of flashes indicating clock status. pattern is 900ms on, 100ms off, from one to four

times (see Fig. 3-33). Table 3-3 explains the Summary of complete sequence. Figure 3-34 shows the
meaning of the number of flashes. complete 15s indication sequence. In summary:
• Constant rapid, equally spaced flashes indicate a
fatal system error.
satellites clock mode
• A fast flicker followed by very short flashes
indicates an error or warning.
| | | | | | | | | | | | | • A steady 5-second light indicates normal operation;
seconds
be prepared to read the satellite count and clock
Fig. 3-33: Pattern of flashes indicating instrument mode. status one second after this light goes off.
• A steady 1.9s light indicates no satellites acquired
Table 3-3: Instrument mode LED indications
• Short, equally spaced flashes indicate satellite and
Flashes Meaning clock status; eight flashes in a row means the
instrument is fully synchronized and ready to
1 Instrument is in Setup mode.
record.
2 Instrument is standing by before recording or • Longer flashes with a short space between them
calibrating, or is paused during recording. indicate setup or recording mode.
3 Instrument is recording site data or calibration
data.
4 Instrument is idling after recording site data or

calibration data.
(sequence repeats…)
number
of clock
normal operation satellites status mode normal operation
normal patterns
warnings/ zero warnings/

alert alert
errors satellites errors
alternate patterns
fatal system error
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
seconds
UTC HH:MM:00, :15, :30, or :45
Fig. 3-34: Complete new indication sequence.
Examples. The following figures show examples of LED

indications under various conditions.

clock
normal operation satellites status mode
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
seconds
Fig. 3-35: Example of normal operation in record mode (site data or calibration data).
number
warning: of clock
alert high temperature satellites status mode
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
seconds
Fig. 3-36: Example of idling after acquisition with internal temperature exceeding 60°C.
number
warning: of clock
alert low battery satellites status mode
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
seconds
Fig. 3-37: Example of operation in standby mode when synchronized to OCXO, with a low battery warning.
Using the new indication sequence If the 5-second light indicates normal operation, then
watch the following flashes to learn the satellite and
Normally you will use the RXUPilot program to learn the clock status. For several minutes after powering on,
details of GPS synchronization, instrument mode, and you should expect to see the 1.9s zero-satellite
so on. However, the LED indications do give you a quick indication and a clock indication of zero, one, or two
way to learn if everything is operating as expected, flashes. After a few minutes the satellite indication will
without having to examine a number of windows in change to show the number of satellites acquired.
RXUPilot.
Once the satellite indication reaches four flashes, you
The most important indication is the steady 5-second should see the clock indicator also change to four
light. This light tells you that the instrument is flashes. Taken together, these eight identical flashes
operating normally. If you see an alert and warning or indicate full GPS and clock synchronization.
error indication instead, take immediate steps to
correct the cause.

46 Chapter 3 Common Operations Starting the V8 and navigating the user interface 46
After the clock is synchronized, you may see the
number of satellites drop to less than four; at that
Starting the V8 and navigating
point, the clock status will change to three flashes to the user interface
indicate synchronization to the crystal oscillator. This is
also a normal condition. When powered on, the V8 presents a Windows®-like
user interface, with standard controls such as menus,
Finally, check the longer flashes of the mode indication. buttons, and text fields, as well as spreadsheet-style
If you are recording or calibrating, you should see three lists and plotted curves. Unlike PC applications,
flashes. When calibration is complete or data recording however, the V8 does not have a mouse or other
has ended according to a schedule, you will see four pointing device, so all commands must be given with
flashes. If you have set up for MT/AMT to record the keyboard.
automatically at a later time, you should see two
flashes. Note Illustrations of the V8 windows and dialog boxes in this
Guide are taken from a PC emulation program, not a
If the LED indications are not what you expect to see, V8 receiver. The appearance of the windows and dialog
use the RXUPilot program to find out where the boxes may vary slightly from what you see on a V8,
problem lies. and the data values do not necessarily reflect typical
field conditions.
Starting and shutting down the V8
To start the V8:
• Press the red POWER switch on the top of the
instrument to the ON position and release it.
After a short delay, the main window appears (see Fig. 3-38).
You can customize the V8 to start up in a Site Setup

dialog box instead of the main window. See “To set
startup and shutdown options:” on page 69.
To shut down the V8:

• Choose the Shutdown command on the main
window or press the POWER switch down (toward the
Fig. 3-38: The V8 main window.
POWER label) and release it.
Warning When shutting down the V8, always wait until About controls, control areas, and
shutdown is complete (the display goes blank)
! before disconnecting the battery. “focus”
At any given time in most windows of the interface, one
area or control will have “focus.” When a control has
focus, that control will be activated when the Enter key
is pressed, or its value can be changed by scrolling or In a spreadsheet or a control area containing text
by typing a new value. A few windows, containing boxes, the cell or text box that has focus appears with
menus only, do not initially place focus on any control. foreground and background colours reversed. In Figure
3-39, the first cell in the Channel spreadsheet has
In many windows, there are several control areas. The
focus.
keyboard commands make it easy to move the focus
from one control area to another, or from one control to
another within an area.
For example, the SIP Setup dialog box contains nine

control areas (see Fig. 3-39):
• the Survey Information area
• the Line text box
• the Site text box
• the Done button
• the Calculate Coord. button
• the Next Site button
• the Channel spreadsheet
• the Box spreadsheet
• the Array Layout area
Fig. 3-39: SIP Site Setup dialog box.
When a button or spreadsheet has focus, a coloured
border appears around it. In Figure 3-39, the Channel
spreadsheet has focus, indicated by the red border.
Moving the focus Tip In windows or dialog boxes that contain spreadsheets,
you can move the focus to the first spreadsheet just by
There are several ways to move the focus, depending pressing Ctrl.
on the type of control or control area.
Moving the focus within a control area. To move the
Moving the focus in tab order. You can press the Tab
focus among spreadsheet cells, text boxes, and groups
key (or Shift +Tab) to move the focus from one control
of controls within an area, press the ARROW keys.
or control area to another. However, you cannot change
the order in which the controls receive focus.
To move the focus within a control area:
Moving the focus in random order. Notice that in • from one control to another within a control area or
Figure 3-39, all the controls or control areas except the from one row to another in a spreadsheet, press the
spreadsheets have a highlighted letter in their names. UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key.
The highlighted letter allows you to move the focus • from column to column in a spreadsheet or among
directly to that control. the letters of a text box, press the LEFT ARROW or
RIGHT ARROW key.
To move the focus directly to a control or control
area:
• Press and release the Ctrl key and then type the Scrolling through lists
highlighted letter. (Unlike on a PC, do not hold the
Scrolling lists are controls with a preset series of values
Ctrl key while typing the letter.)
you can choose from. You cannot type a new value in a
scrolling list.
When a scrolling list has focus, it appears with white To activate a command button do one of the
foreground on a magenta background: following:
• Press the Tab key to move the focus to the
command button and press either the Enter key or
the space bar.
Fig. 3-40: A scrolling list that has focus. • Press and release Ctrl, then type the highlighted
letter on the button. (Unlike on a PC, do not hold
To scroll through a list: the Ctrl key while typing the letter.)
• Press the space bar to scroll in one direction; press
Enter to scroll in the opposite direction. To activate menus:
1. Press the F1 Menu key to place the focus on the
The value that is displayed takes effect when you move the focus
away from the list or when you close the dialog box containing menus.
the list. 2. Use the ARROW keys to move the focus to the
desired menu.
Activating menu and button 3. Press Enter to activate the menu.
commands To activate menu commands, do one of the
Commands are available on buttons and in menus, and following:
most have a highlighted letter for random access. • Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to choose a
menu command and then press Enter.
• Press and release the Ctrl key and then type the
highlighted letter in the menu command name.
(Unlike on a PC, do not hold the Ctrl key while you can select characters by holding the Shift key while
typing the letter.) moving the cursor.
Tip If you have memorized the highlighted letters for the To enter or change values in a text box:
menu commands, you can type Ctrl and the letter for a
command without pressing the F1 Menu key or opening
• Use any method described earlier to move the focus
the individual menus. to the text box, move the cursor or select text as
desired, and then type the new value using the
keyboard.
Entering and changing values Scrolling through lists. When the focus moves to a
scrolling list, the current list item will be highlighted in
The V8 uses three kinds of fields: text boxes, scrolling
magenta.
lists, and spreadsheet cells.
Typing text. Many areas of the interface allow you to To scroll through a list:
type text values, such as survey names or dipole • When the scrolling list has focus, press the space
lengths. Typing on the V8 is similar to typing on a PC. If bar to scroll in one direction; press Enter to scroll in
characters are selected, typing replaces them. If no the opposite direction.
characters are selected, typed characters appear at the
cursor location. Editing spreadsheets. Spreadsheets are used to group
parameters and calculate or display values. V8
When the focus moves to a text box, the entire spreadsheets behave slightly differently from PC
contents are selected. As on a PC, you can use the LEFT spreadsheets. On a PC, you can type directly in any cell
ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys to move the cursor, and that has focus. In most spreadsheet cells on the V8,
you must make each entry in a dialog box before the
entry will appear in the spreadsheet cell. In the 2. Press Delete.
Channel spreadsheet of the Site Setup windows,
some cells are actually scrolling lists, although they do To add rows to a spreadsheet:
not appear highlighted in magenta. • With the focus on any cell in a spreadsheet, press
Insert.
To enter or change values in a spreadsheet cell:
A new blank row is inserted and other rows are moved down to
1. Use the ARROW keys to move to the cell you want to make room.
change.
2. Press Enter or the space bar.
Saving settings when closing
If the cell is a scrolling list in the Channel spreadsheet, the next
value in the list appears. Otherwise, a dialog box appears. The windows
dialog box may contain a text box or a scrolling list highlighted in
magenta. The values you set in dialog box controls are saved
automatically, so there is no Save command. When you
3. In a dialog box, either scroll to the list item you
are satisfied with your settings, you can simply close
want and press the Tab key, or type the value you
the dialog box. You can, however, save some settings
want and press Enter.
to a file for future use (a setup.tbl file) or for automatic
4. Press Enter to activate the OK button and close the loading next time the V8 is powered on (a startup.tbl
dialog box. file). See the next section for instructions.
To delete rows from a spreadsheet: To close a window or dialog box, do any of the
1. Use the ARROW keys to move to any cell in the row following:
you want to delete. • Press Ctrl and type D.
• Press Esc. To save a setup.tbl or startup.tbl file:
• Press the Tab key repeatedly until the Close or • From the Setup menu in an Acquisition window,
Done button has focus and then press Enter. choose either Save Startup(*.tbl) File or Save
Setup(*.tbl) File.
Saving and loading settings files To load a setup.tbl file:

You can save settings to a file for future use. Two types • From the Setup menu in an Acquisition window
of parameter table (*.tbl) files are available: on the V8, choose Load Setup(*.tbl) File.
• a setup.tbl file that you can reload manually on the
V8 To use a startup.tbl file:
• a startup.tbl file that the V8 or RXU loads • Insert the CF card containing the startup.tbl file (in
automatically when it is powered on the \DATA directory) in the RXU or V8 you want to
use. The file will be loaded automatically when you
The files are saved on the CompactFlash card in the
power the instrument on.
\DATA directory. If you save a startup.tbl file, you can
use a PC to copy the file to the \DATA directory of other
CF cards for use in RXU instruments.
You can also create table files on a PC using the TblEdit Entering survey information
program. See Chapter 4, “Table Files and TblEdit” on
The Survey Information area of the Site Setup
page 87 for more information. window for each geophysical method allows you to
keep some basic records concerning the project. (See
Fig. 3-41 on page 54.)
53 Chapter 3 Common Operations Entering survey information 53

54 Chapter 3 Common Operations Entering survey information 54
characters long, and the Line and Site names, which
can be 15 characters long. Survey information can be
changed at any time, regardless of whether the
instrument is recording data or not.
If the instruments are on a radio network, each time

you choose Start Recording from the Acquisition
Fig. 3-41: Survey Information area of a Site Setup window. menu, the V8 will transmit the Site name and Line
number to the other instruments.
The information you enter here is saved on the
CompactFlash card in a file with the extension TBL. To enter the Survey Information:
The survey information you can enter comprises: 1. In the Site Setup window, press Ctrl and type S to
move the focus to the Survey Information area.
• A Project name
2. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to move the
• Your Company name
focus to each text box and type the desired infor-
• Your Client’s name, if you are contracting
mation.
• A description of the Survey Area
3. Press Ctrl, L to move to the Line textbox and type
• The instrument Operator’s name
the identifier you have chosen for the current
• A Comment
survey line.
• A Line name or number
4. Press Ctrl, T to move to the Site textbox and type
• A Site name or number
the identifier you have chosen for the current site
Text in each box can be up to 64 characters long, on the survey line.
except the Comment text, which can be 128
Entering Box information and Because the number of entries in the Box spreadsheet
influences memory allocation, you can only add or
changing mode delete instruments and channels when the instrument
is in Setup mode. This mode is selected by default
One requirement common to all geophysical methods when you first open a Site Setup window. If you need
except MT/AMT is to define the instrument(s) used in to change the number of instruments or channels at a
the survey. The word “box” appears in the interface as later time, first change the mode to Setup as described
a short term for “instrument.” The term refers to any under “Understanding gain” on page 55.
networked devices used in the survey, including
transmitters, the V8, and remotes such as the RXU-TM.
You enter instrument information in the Site Setup

Understanding gain
window for the particular method you are using. The “correct” setting for channel gain is dependent on
local conditions of signal strength and noise. The
Five types of information can be entered for each
objective is to set the gain as high as possible, without
instrument:
causing saturated records. As you build experience with
• Instrument type or function
your equipment in your locale, you will be able to judge
• Serial number the best settings to start with, and when to modify
• Number of channels them.
• Gains
• Operating mode Table 3-4 shows the peak signal strength that can be
recorded at each gain setting.
• Remote control
55 Chapter 3 Common Operations Entering Box information and changing mode 55

Table 3-4: Channel gain factors and signal Setting up instrument type, serial
strength
number, channels, and gains
Gain Setting Peak Signal Strength
The first five columns in the Box spreadsheet contain
0.25 10.0V information on the instruments and their channels,
1 2.5V including the gain factors to be used (see Fig. 3-42).
4 0.6V
16 0.15V
Fig. 3-42: Box types, serial numbers, channels, and gains in the Box
If gains are set too high, records will be saturated and spreadsheet.
data quality will be poor. To evaluate your gain settings,
monitor the instrument during acquisition as described Channel terminology. In TDEM, the receiver records
in the chapters for the individual techniques. The the rate of change of the magnetic field, or dB/dt, so
number of saturated records appears in the status bar the channels are referred to as “B” channels. In other
(“Sat’d Recs:”). If more than a few records are methods, magnetic channels are referred to as “H”
saturated, reduce the gain. channels. In all methods, electric channels are referred
to as “E” channels.
You can set a warning threshold in the Options and
Status screen, so that the status bar will change colour
when too many saturations have occurred. See
“Customizing the V8 by setting options” on page 67.
Note Gain can only be changed on the V8 that is being set
4. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to move to the Box SN
up and on remote instruments that are connected over column and enter the serial number of the
the radio network. If you want to change remote instrument.
channel settings, set up the radio network first, then 5. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to move to the Channels
return to the Box spreadsheet to change remote
column and if necessary, enter the number of
channel settings.
channels that will be used on the instrument. (If the
The second line of the Box spreadsheet refers to the instrument is on the radio network, the number of
V8 itself, so the Box Type and Box SN (serial number) channels may already be displayed.)
cells are read-only on this line. (The first line of the 6. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to move to the E Gain
spreadsheet refers to the transmitter monitor. ) column and choose a setting from the scrolling list.
(See Table 3-4 on page 56 for the effect of each
To enter serial numbers, channels, and gains: setting on dynamic range.)
1. Press Ctrl, B to move the focus to the Box 7. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to move to the H Gain
spreadsheet. column (B Gain in TDEM) and choose a setting
2. Press the ARROW keys to move the focus to the row from the scrolling list.
you want to work with. If you are setting up the V8
Receiver itself, skip to step 5.
Understanding instrument modes
3. In the Box Type column, scroll through the list and
choose the instrument type—either Transmitter or System 2000.net instruments have a number of
Auxiliary Box. operating modes, for recording data, calibrating,
setting up, etc. The mode changes automatically when
you choose commands from the Acquisition menus,

but you can also set the mode directly or read the Recording after pausing) from the Acquisition menu
current mode in the Box spreadsheet Mode column. of a controlled-source (CS) method Acquisition
window. The instrument acquires data from all
Possible instrument modes are:
channels when in this mode. Remote-controlled
• Setup instruments on a radio network will change to this
• CS Record (Controlled-Source Record) mode in tandem with the V8.
• CS Pause (Controlled-Source Pause)
CS Pause. the instrument enters this mode when you
• CS Standby (Controlled-Source Standby)
choose Pause Recording from the Acquisition menu
• Shutdown of a controlled-source (CS) method Acquisition
• Coil Cal window. This mode interrupts controlled-source
• Box Cal recording without closing the station data file. It is
• GPS Reset useful when you want to adjust gain (or filter) settings
• Pot Res Check without starting a new file. Remote-controlled
• Pot-Coil Check instruments on a radio network will change to this
• Record mode in tandem with the V8.
Setup mode. This is the default mode of the V8 or RXU CS Standby. the instrument enters this mode when you
when you power it on, unless you have programmed it choose Standby from the Acquisition menu of a
to start up in Record mode for MT/AMT. An instrument controlled-source (CS) method Acquisition window.
must be in Setup mode before you can change channel This mode interrupts controlled-source recording and
or instrument information in a Site Setup window. closes the station file. When you select Start
Recording again, the new station file name is
CS Record. The instrument enters this recording mode
automatically incremented. Use this mode when you
when you select Start Recording (or Resume
want to make separate measurements at a single site Pot Res Check. This mode has not yet been
or when you want to move the array along the survey implemented. In future releases, the instrument will
line without shutting down the instrument. Remote- measure contact resistance on E channels when this
controlled instruments on a radio network will change mode is selected.
to this mode in tandem with the V8.
Pot-Coil Check. This mode has not yet been
Shutdown. The instrument enters this mode when you implemented. In future releases, the instrument will
select the Shutdown command from the Setup menu verify that there are no open circuits on E, H, or B
or the main window. channels when this mode is selected.
Coil Cal. The instrument enters this mode when you Record. The instrument enters this mode when you
perform a sensor (coil) calibration. The V8 must select Start Recording Immediately from the MT/
already be calibrated itself in order to calibrate a AMT Acquisition menu, or when the instrument begins
sensor. recording on the schedule defined in the MT/AMT
Acquisition Setup window.
Box Cal. The instrument enters this mode when you
perform an instrument calibration.
To change mode:
GPS Reset. If an instrument has been moved a great • In most cases, you should use the menu commands
distance since it last achieved satellite lock, it can take in the Acquisition or Calibration windows and
up to 30min to acquire satellite signals. Resetting the allow the instrument to change mode itself.
GPS receiver can significantly reduce this delay. This However, if you need to change mode directly,
mode is more easily accessed by a command button in move the focus to the Mode cell for the instrument
the Options and Status dialog box. you want to change and scroll through the list to
the mode you want.

60 Chapter 3 Common Operations Setting up remote control 60
The mode changes as soon as you select OK. make the change using RXUPilot at the remote
instrument. See Chapters 5, 6, and 7 for instructions.)
Setting up remote control To change a remote instrument mode manually:

• Move the focus to the Mode cell for the remote
In a radio network, the V8 can control the recording instrument you want to change and scroll through
mode of other instruments. If you enable remote the list to the mode you want.
control, other instruments on the network will change
The instrument mode changes when you select OK.
their recording mode when you change the V8
recording mode. (Changing to modes unrelated to
recording, such as GPS Reset or Calibration, has no
effect on remotes.) Setting up filtering and
To set up remote control: coupling
• In the Box spreadsheet, move the focus to the System 2000.net instruments have a number of filter
Remote Control column and choose Yes to enable and coupling settings that help to reduce the effects of
remote control or No to disable it. noise and static shift. These reductions improve the
signal-to-noise ratio and help to prevent saturated
If you choose not to enable remote control, you must
records caused by input exceeding the dynamic range
change the remote instrument mode manually. If the
of the instrument.
radio network is working, you can make the change
from the V8. (If the network is not operating, you can Filtering and coupling are set from the Acquisition
Parameters dialog box in each of the geophysical
methods. (Other settings in the dialog box will vary To determine the best value for a given electrode
with the method, and so placement of the filter and resistance, examine the effect of various filter settings
coupling controls may also vary slightly.) as shown in the graphs discussed next.
The low pass filter allows optimization over a range of

Setting the low pass filter electrode resistance. Set the filter to the weakest value
that effectively reduces noise.
The input low pass (LP) filter has five settings,
Low pass filter graphs. Figures 3-44, 3-45, and 3-46
numbered from 0 to 4. The choice of setting depends
starting on page 63 show frequency response versus
on the dipole contact resistance: the higher the
electrode resistance with various LP Filter settings,
resistance, the weaker the filter that should be used.
using the AMT method as an example. The numbers
A filter setting that is too strong for the contact beside the data point symbols in the legends
resistance will introduce phase shift error into the correspond to the the cutoff frequency selected in the
upper frequencies, and plots of apparent resistivity will LP Filter area of the Acquisition Parameters dialog
show a sharp rolloff at these frequencies. (This rolloff box.
may be hard to recognize if near surface resistivity
changes rapidly with depth.)
When strong VLF radio signals are present (within

approximately 150km of a transmitter), a special VLF
filter that provides a sharper cutoff between 10kHz and
20kHz may improve data quality. Fig. 3-43: Correspondence between graph legend and LP Filter
setting.
61 Chapter 3 Common Operations Setting up filtering and coupling 61

The filter should be set to the lowest value that Figures 3-44 and 3-45 contrast the effect of no
effectively reduces noise, because phase shift error in feedback versus a feedback corner frequency of 10kHz.
the higher frequencies increases with the strength of Feedback provides a means to optimize the instrument,
the filter. and is enabled when the instructions for setting low
pass filter parameters are followed. (Feedback is
Values greater than 4 are shown on the graphs for automatically disabled for TDEM methods.)
completeness, although data acquired with such
settings are generally not useable. Figure 3-46 shows the effect of turning off the VLF trap.
Note Because the calibration function of the data processing

software attempts to correct for the filter effects, it is
still possible to acquire useable data at frequencies
above the curves on the graphs.
Input L = 1 mH - No feedback - VLF Trap
100000 0
Frequency - 30° or 2 dB error - Hz
1
10000
2
3
4
5
1000
6
7
100
100 1000 10000 100000

Pot resistance - ohm
Fig. 3-44: Response curves for broadband (no feedback corner frequency) with VLF trapping On.

Input L = 1 mH Feedback corner 10 kHz - VLF Trap
100000
0
1
10000
2
3
4
1000
5
6
7
100
100 1000 10000 100000

Fig. 3-45: Response curves for AMT (10kHz feedback corner frequency) with VLF trapping On.
Input L = 1 mH Feedback corner 10 kHz - No VLF Trap
100000
0
1
10000
2
3
4
5
1000
6
7
100
100 1000 10000 100000

Fig. 3-46: Response curves for AMT (10kHz feedback corner frequency) with VLF trapping Off.

To set the low pass filter: To set the Line Frequency filter:
1. In the Acquisition Parameters dialog box, press • In the Acquisition Parameters dialog box, press
Ctrl, P and select the appropriate filtering, Ctrl, L and select either 50Hz or 60Hz, to match
according to the electrode resistance: the local line frequency:
2. Check or clear the VLF trap checkbox as appro- Setting coupling parameters
priate.
The Coupling setting governs the high pass filter.
Note To accurately measure contact resistance ≥ 2000 Ω,
When the V8 is set to AC coupling, it uses a high pass
you must disconnect the channel input cables from the
V8. Measure from the ground terminal to each cable
filter with a corner frequency of 2Hz that removes self-
end, and between the two cable ends of each dipole. potential from the dipole. Because signal strength
increases with wavelength, this design allows
acquisition of lower frequencies without saturating the
Setting the line frequency filter input channels. For most MT and AMT soundings, use
AC coupling.
Be sure to set the Line Frequency filter according to
In the case where the DC potential measured on the
the local power line frequency: 50 or 60Hz. This filter
electrodes is very low (less than about 20 mV) and the
setting reduces noise from the power grid.
target wavelengths are >1000s, you may find that DC
coupling (no filter) improves MT or AMT results. For warning colour. (In some cases, a Warning dialog box
TDEM methods, always use DC coupling. will appear instead.)
You can choose whether times are shown as local times

To set Coupling:
or as UTC. You can choose whether to have the V8 start
• Press Ctrl, C and select either AC or DC coupling for
up in one of the Setup windows rather than the main
the E channels (H channels are not used in SIP):
window, and whether to display a confirmation dialog
box when the shutdown command is given. Lastly, you
can choose whether to save your settings in a file for
automatic use at the next start-up.
To customize the data displays, see “Customizing data

and plot appearance” on page 70.
Customizing the V8 by setting
To access the customization options:
options • From the Setup menu in any Acquisition window,
You can customize the V8 in a number of ways. For choose Options and Status.
example, you can change the colours of some elements The Options dialog box appears (see Fig. 3-47).
and adjust the contrast of the screen or turn off the
backlight. You can also set thresholds, or Warning
levels, for certain conditions. If the Warning level is
exceeded, the condition will be highlighted on the
Status bar at the bottom of the screen in your chosen
67 Chapter 3 Common Operations Customizing the V8 by setting options 67

To change colours:
1. In the Options and Status spreadsheet, move the
focus to one of the colour parameter values at the
bottom of the spreadsheet:
• Text colour
• Warning colour
2. Scroll through the list of available colours until you
find the one you want.
The change will take effect within a second or two.
Fig. 3-47: The Options dialog box.
To change the display contrast:

• Move the focus to the Contrast slider bar and use
the ARROW keys to adjust the slider.
To toggle the backlight on and off:

• Select or clear the Turn on screen backlight
checkbox.
To set the Warning thresholds: To set startup and shutdown options:
• In the Options and Status spreadsheet Warning • To have the V8 start up in the Site Setup dialog
column, set minimum values for any of the first box of the currently selected geophysical method,
seven rows: select Enter <method> window on power up.
• Free disk space
To have the V8 start up in the main window, clear
• Temperature (internal instrument temperature) the Enter <method> window on power up
• Battery 1 (voltage of the first external battery) checkbox.
• Battery 2 (voltage of a second, optional, • To have a confirmation dialog box appear when you
external battery; special cable required) choose the Shutdown command, select Confirm
• Battery 3 (voltage of the battery in the V8-EX) on shutdown or quit.
• Saturated records To have the V8 shutdown without confirmation,

• GPS satellites (a value of 3 is recommended) clear the Confirm upon shutdown or quit
checkbox.
To set local or UTC time: • To have the current parameters saved in a file
1. Move the focus to the Time Zone area and to the (startup.tbl) to be used at the next start-up, select
desired standard: UTC or Local. Save Startup.tbl file on exit or shutdown.
2. Press Enter or the space bar to activate your choice.
3. If you chose Local time, move the focus to the
Local and UTC time difference box, and scroll to
the correct time difference.

70 Chapter 3 Common Operations Checking instrument status 70
Customizing data and plot Note Plot parameters vary depending on the geophysical
appearance method in use. Detailed information is provided in the
chapter on each method.
During data acquisition, you can change the
appearance of listed data and plotted data in several To customize data plots:
ways. You can choose to see only a spreadsheet-style 1. From the Acquisition window, activate the View
list of numerical data, or only a graphical plot of the menu and choose Plot Parameters, or type the
data, or both. shortcut: Ctrl, M.
2. Change the settings in the Plot Parameters dialog
To display plots, lists, or both:
box that appears.
1. From any Acquisition window, activate the View
menu.
2. To see both a graphical plot and a spreadsheet
listing of data, choose Plot + List. Checking instrument status
3. To see only a graphical plot, choose Plot Only.
Although a few key operating parameters are shown in
4. To see only a spreadsheet listing of data, choose the status bar at the bottom of the Acquisition
List Only. windows, you may want more detailed information on
the status of the V8 or of other instruments on the
You can also customize the appearance of the graphical
radio network. For example, you may want to know the
plot. For example, you can choose symbol sizes and
operating temperature, remaining disk space, or
colours, change the scale or the grid, and so on.
battery condition of an instrument. The Options and
Status dialog box provides quick access to this Before each survey begins, all instruments and sensors
information. must be calibrated. Once the equipment is set up, the
process takes about 10 minutes for a V8 or RXU and
To check instrument status: one hour or more (in half-hour increments) for
1. From the Setup menu in any Acquisition window, magnetic sensors. Calibration of a current sensor takes
choose Options and Status, or type the shortcut: about half an hour for use with lower output
Ctrl, O. transmitters and up to four hours for use with a high-
output transmitter (e.g., a T-200), in 12-minute
The Options dialog box appears and displays the Status increments. Each calibration must be completed in a
spreadsheet (See Fig. 3-47 on page 68.).
single session; it cannot be interrupted and resumed.
2. Scroll through the Select box serial number list
at the bottom of the dialog box to the instrument Warning Starting a calibration erases any corresponding
you want to examine. (Only the V8 and instruments existing files.
!
currently on the radio network are listed.)
3. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to scroll Calibration is independent from operation: once an
through the spreadsheet. instrument is calibrated it can be used for any of the
geophysical methods and any acquisition parameters.
The instrument uses the calibration results and your
Calibrating the equipment gain and filter settings to calculate instrument response
for any filter settings that may be used.
This section applies to all equipment generally and to If magnetic sensors are used, the usual practice is to
the V8 in particular. For detailed information on calibrate the V8 and then the sensors immediately
calibrating RXU instruments, see Chapters 6 and 7.
71 Chapter 3 Common Operations Calibrating the equipment 71

after, at the survey remote reference site or the first The V8 stores the resulting calibration file in the \CAL
acquisition station. However, an instrument can be directory on its internal disk. The file is named
calibrated on its own, even indoors if GPS signals can SSSS.CLB, where SSSS is the serial number of the V8. Do
be received. not rename, move, or delete the directory or the
calibration file.
No additional equipment is needed to perform a
calibration.
To determine the calibration status:
Note For best results, the instrument should be at operating 1. From the main window, choose Calibrate.
temperature when you start the calibration. In normal 2. Look at the status bar at the bottom of the
ambient conditions, an instrument will reach a stable Calibration window.
operating temperature 10–15 minutes after it is
powered on. In cold weather, allow more time before
you start the calibration. You can monitor the internal
temperature in the Options and Status dialog box.
Fig. 3-48: Calibration status bar.
If calibration files exist, the status bar will read Box

Calibrating the V8 Cal OK and/or Coil Cal OK. If the files don’t exist,
the status bar will read Box No Cal and/or Coil No
A V8 must be calibrated before acquiring data or
Cal.
calibrating sensors. Because calibration requires GPS
satellite lock, it is usually done outdoors. However, if
the GPS antenna can be positioned outdoors and
connected to the V8 with an extended cable, then the
calibration can be done indoors.
Tip If you intend to calibrate a V8 and magnetic sensors in
6. From the status bar that appears at the bottom of
the same session, plan for enough time and choose an the screen (see Fig. 3-49), note the number of GPS
outdoor location suitable for both. To work efficiently, satellites that have been acquired. Wait if necessary
begin the layout of the sensors while the V8 calibration until at least four satellites have been acquired;
is in progress. calibration cannot proceed without a minimum of
four satellites.
Tools and equipment required:
• V8 to be calibrated
• Battery and cable Fig. 3-49: The status bar, showing the number of GPS satellites
• GPS antenna and cable acquired.
To calibrate a V8: 7. From the Setup menu, select either 50Hz or

1. Connect the GPS antenna to the V8 as described on 60Hz, according to the local power grid frequency.
page 24. 8. If the V8 temperature is stable, then from the
2. Connect the battery to the V8 as described on Calibration menu, choose Box Calibration.
page 33. Calibration begins immediately. The status bar displays Box No
3. Power up the V8 by pushing the red POWER switch Cal, then Box In Progress.
up to the ON position and releasing it. 9. Wait approximately 10 minutes while the
4. If the instrument starts up in an Acquisition instrument calibrates itself, until the status bar
window, exit to the main window. reads Box Cal OK.
5. In the main window, type Ctrl, B to open the 10. If you want to calibrate sensors, continue with the
Calibration window. next procedure.

11. If you are not continuing with sensor calibration, trenches. (If sunlight is the only potential problem,
exit to the main window. plan to cover each sensor with a tarpaulin.)
Tip The remote reference site to be used in a survey is

Calibrating coil sensors (MTC-30/50) often the best place to perform calibrations, because it
is chosen for its low-noise characteristics.
MT, AMT, and CSAMT techniques usually require one or
more magnetic sensors, either coils or loop. Magnetic The V8 stores the resulting calibration files in the \CAL
sensors must be calibrated (using a calibrated V8) directory on its internal disk. The file names are
before acquiring data. Sensors can only be calibrated determined by the serial numbers and sensor types
outdoors, although the layout requirements for entered by the operator in the Coil Calibration dialog
calibration are not as rigorous as for data acquisition. box. The V8 will add the extension CLC to each file
Sensor calibration takes at least one hour, and can be name. Do not rename, move, or delete the \CAL
extended in increments of half an hour to a maximum directory.
of four hours. The noisier the area, the more time is
needed to ensure a quality calibration. Note The instrument that is used to calibrate sensors must
already be calibrated itself. (The instrument calibration
Electrical noise, physical vibration, and temperature file (*.CLB) must be listed in the Options and Status
variation all contribute to poor calibration data. dialog box, and the status bar must read Box Cal
OK.)
Although the sensors do not have to be buried to be
calibrated, do choose a location protected from wind
and sunlight, and away from sources of electrical noise Tools and equipment required:
and vehicle or pedestrian traffic. If these conditions • Sensors to be calibrated and a cable for each
cannot be met, plan to bury the coils in shallow • Calibrated V8 with magnetic channels
• Battery and cable 7. To minimize wind-induced noise, ensure that the
• GPS antenna and cable sensor cables lie flat on the ground. (Place weights
• A ground electrode and cable on them every metre or so if necessary.)
• Optionally, tarpaulins for covering the sensors or a 8. If you are burying the coils, cover them with the
shovel for burying them earth removed from the trenches.
9. Complete the Layout Sheet for the site.
To lay out a site for coil calibration:
1. Choose a location for the coils and position the V8 ~10m
about 10m away.
2. Install a ground electrode and connect it to the GND
connector on the V8. ~3m GPS
3. Ten metres away, lay the coils parallel, flat on the

ground about 3m apart, with all the connectors
oriented toward the V8. ~3m 12V
4. If you are going to bury the coils, dig a trench
alongside each, about 30cm deep and slightly V8
longer than the coil.

5. On a Layout Sheet, note the serial number of each
coil and designate it as either Hx, Hy, or Hz.
Fig. 3-50: Coil calibration layout.
6. Connect the sensors to the V8 (see “Handling
locking-ring connectors” on page 18).

To calibrate sensors: 5. In each serial number text box, type the 4-digit
1. If you are not continuing in the same session after serial number of the sensor. If no sensor is
calibrating a V8, then start up a calibrated connected to any of the Hx, Hy, or Hz channels,
instrument and select Calibration from the main leave the text box blank for that channel.
window. 6. For each sensor, choose the coil type from the
2. From the Setup menu, select either 50Hz or corresponding list.
60Hz, according to the local power grid frequency.
Note Be certain that the serial numbers and coil types are
3. From the Calibration menu, choose Coil correct and are correctly identified as being Hx, Hy, or
Calibration. Hz as you noted when you laid out the coils. An error
The Coil Calibration dialog box appears. here means that all data acquired with the affected
sensor(s) will be invalid—a potentially costly mistake.
7. To start the calibration, choose OK; to cancel the

calibration, choose Cancel.
Calibration begins as soon as you select OK. The status bar
displays Coil No Cal, then Coil In Progress.
Fig. 3-51: The Coil Calibration dialog box. 8. Wait until the status bar displays Coil Cal OK
before closing the Calibration window. (Sensor
4. Choose a calibration duration from the Coil
calibration may take a few minutes longer than the
Calibration time list. If you know that the area is
time set in the Coil Calibration dialog box.)
electrically noisy, set this parameter to a higher
number.
Calibrating air-loop sensors • 250m of #12–#18 gauge copper wire for the
excitation loop
In MT or AMT surveys where the ground is too hard or • Measuring tape (≥50m)
rocky to bury a vertical coil sensor, an air-loop sensor • A shovel
can be substituted. • Marking stakes
Calibration of an air-loop uses an excitation loop as the • A compass and tripod
signal source. (See Fig. 3-52.)
To lay out the excitation loop:
Air-loops and coil sensors can be calibrated at the same
1. Review the diagram on page 78.
time on any of the three H channels, as long as the
2. Prepare the wire for the excitation loop by marking
serial numbers and sensor types are entered correctly
it with coloured tape at 25m, 75m, 125m, 175m,
in the dialog box.
and 200m. The tape will mark the corners and the
end of the loop. Wind the wire onto a portable
Tools and equipment required:
spool.
• Sensor(s) to be calibrated and a cable for each
3. Set up a compass on a tripod where you plan the
• adapter cable
centre of the loop.
• Air-loop “CAL Box” and cable
4. Sight from the compass toward one of the planned
• Calibrated V8
corners and have an assistant place a stake to mark
• Battery and cable
1.6m, 10.4m, and 35.35m. These stakes mark two
• GPS antenna and cable
corners of the AL-100 loop, and one corner of the
• A ground electrode and cable
excitation loop.

50m x 50m excitation loop
5. If more than one AL-100 loop is to be calibrated,
(#12–#18 Cu) repeat step 4, sighting at a 90° angle to the first
corner.
35.35m 6. Stake the remaining corners of the excitation loop
by sighting at 90° increments and measuring
35.35m.
7. Starting at the midpoint between two corners, walk
10.4m
1.6m the perimeter of the loop, unwinding the copper
8.8m wire from the portable spool as you go. Align the
tape markings at the corners to verify your
compass sightings and measurements.
Loop 8. Connect the excitation loop ends to the Air-loop CAL
pre-amplifiers
Box.
Hy Hx To lay out the AL-100 air-loop:

25m 25m
1. Using the stakes at the 1.6m and 10.4m
Black Red
measurements, position two opposite air-loop
Air-loop
CAL Box Hz corners as shown in the diagram. (The four corners
of the AL-100 loop are marked with tape and a
GPS
12V V8
preamplifier.)
2. Gently pull the remaining two corners into position.
Fig. 3-52: Air-loop sensor calibration.
To connect the V8:
1. Position the calibrated V8 near the Air-loop CAL
Box.
2. Install the ground electrode and connect it to the
GND connector on the V8.
3. On a Layout Sheet, note the serial number(s) of the

air-loop(s) and connect the cable(s) to the V8 as
either Hx or Hy.
4. Connect the Air-loop CAL Box to the V8 as Hz.
5. Complete the Layout Sheet.
Fig. 3-53: Air-loop CAL Box.
To calibrate air-loop sensors:
3. Verify that:
• Follow the instructions for calibrating coils on
• The air-loop sides are parallel to the excitation page 76, being sure to choose LOOP as the coil
loop sides. type.
• The air-loop forms a perfect square. (Opposite
corners are 8.8m apart.)
• The pre-amplifier is at one corner of the air-loop.
Cancelling a calibration
• The cable to the V8 exits the pre-amplifier toward You can cancel a calibration that is in progress.
the right when viewed from within the air-loop. However, if you do so, there will be no calibration
file for the instrument or sensors that were being

calibrated. Starting a calibration erases any Importing calibration files
corresponding existing files; cancelling a calibration
writes no new files. The instrument or sensor(s) will If you want to use a saved calibration file but the file is
have to be recalibrated before use. not stored on the V8, you can import the file. This
capability lets you calibrate sensors once and use them
To cancel a calibration: on different instruments without having to recalibrate.
You can also import an instrument (box) calibration file,
• From the Calibration menu, choose Stop
if for some reason it has been removed from the V8.
Calibration.
(Normally, however, it would be better to simply
recalibrate the V8, as the process takes only 10
Viewing calibration results minutes.)
You can view the results of a calibration in graphical Note Files for sensors that were calibrated under field
form. conditions (temperature, power grid frequency, etc.)
different from those at the survey site are not suitable
for import. You must recalibrate the sensors under
To view calibration results: current conditions.
1. From the View menu, select the type of calibration
file you want to see, Coil or Box. To import a calibration file:
2. Either type the file name in the File name text box 1. Install a CF card in a PC card reader and create a
or select a file from the spreadsheet. folder at the card’s root level named NEWCAL.
3. Choose OK to display the calibration results. 2. Copy the calibration file into the NEWCAL folder.
4. If you want, change the appearance of the plot by
choosing Plot Parameters from the View menu.
3. With the V8 powered off, install the CF card in the one large file (useful in monitoring applications), you
V8 card slot. can specify file duration in integral factors of 24 hours.
4. Start up the V8.
To control data logging:
The calibration file will be automatically copied to the V8 CAL
directory. 1. On the V8, from the Setup menu in any
Acquisition window, choose Options and Status.
2. If the instruments are on a radio network, press
Ctrl, S and select the serial number of the
Saving data files instrument you want to configure.
System 2000.net instruments normally save both the 3. In the Options and Status spreadsheet, move the
raw time series and the stacked waveforms on the focus to either Waveform file log or Stack result
CompactFlash card. If the instruments are on a radio file log and scroll to the value you want to use.
network, they will also save the stacked waveforms
from remote instrument channels. Note To help prevent the loss of data, file logging reverts to
the defaults (save time series and save stack results
In the future, the geophysical statistics may also be from all instruments) when you restart the instrument
saved. This feature (Statistics file log) is not yet or when you choose a geophysical method from the
main window.
implemented.
For testing purposes or to save disk space, you can To specify file duration:
turn off the logging of these file types. To reduce
1. On the V8, from the Setup menu in any
network traffic, you can turn off logging of remote
Acquisition window, choose Options and Status.
instruments. To save multiple, smaller files instead of
81 Chapter 3 Common Operations Saving data files 81

82 Chapter 3 Common Operations Upgrading instrument capabilities 82
2. If the instruments are on a radio network, press To add capability to your instrument, contact Phoenix
Ctrl, S and select the serial number of the to purchase the licence for the method(s) you want to
instrument you want to configure. add. (You will need to provide the serial number of the
3. In the Options and Status spreadsheet, move the instrument you want to upgade.) Phoenix will provide a
focus to File close time and scroll to the value you new licence file that you then import to the instrument.
want to use.
To import a new licence file:
If you choose By schedule, the files will be closed
1. Install a CF card in a PC card reader and create a
when you select Standby from the Acquisition folder at the card’s root level named LICNEW. (If
menu, or when you exit a geophysical method, or
the CF card has already been used in a V8 or RXU,
(in MT/AMT) when the Data record end time is
the folder may already exist.)
reached.
2. Copy the new licence file into the LICNEW folder.
3. With the V8 or RXU powered off, install the CF card
in the instrument card slot.
Upgrading instrument 4. Start up the instrument.
capabilities The instrument will import the licence file and the new
method(s) will be fully functional.
System 2000.net instruments are capable of a variety
of geophysical methods, each of which is licenced
separately. You can purchase the hardware with a
licence for only one method or for several methods,
and you can upgrade to additional methods later.
PC requirements Ensuring quality data
To process data or to create and edit parameter table Phoenix instruments are designed to acquire the
files or frequency-stepping schedules for the V8 and/or highest quality data possible, but many factors outside
the RXU-TM, you will need a PC running Microsoft® the instrument can affect quality. This section
highlights ways that you can maximize the results you
Windows® 98 or later, equipped with:
get from your Phoenix equipment.
• a CompactFlash card reader
• Phoenix data processing software
• the TblEdit program, or Storage and handling
• Notepad or a spreadsheet program such as • To keep cables tangle-free, gather them carefully
Microsoft Excel, and into figure-8 shapes after use. Inspect cables
• Phoenix Generate Frequency Stepping Table utility frequently for breaks in the insulation.
(FreqTabl.exe) • Never try to move a coil sensor by pulling on its
cable.
To install the Phoenix PC software: • Always store porous pot electrodes in salt water
1. Insert either the CD-ROM or floppy disk into the PC (50g/L) to prolong their life and reduce contact
drive. resistance.
2. Run the Setup.exe program contained on the disk
and follow the on-screen instructions.
83 Chapter 3 Common Operations PC requirements 83

84 Chapter 3 Common Operations Ensuring quality data 84
Warning Electrodes contain small amounts of toxic lead-

resistance between any pair. Resistance should be
chloride that gradually seeps through the porous <100Ω. Also measure the DC potential between the
! ceramic base. Avoid touching the bottom surface pair. Self-potential should be <10mV (<2mV when
of the electrodes, and wash hands thoroughly if new).
there is any possibility of contamination. Dispose • Test your batteries after each use. If a reading falls
of depleted electrodes according to local
hazardous waste guidelines.
to 10V, the battery should probably be replaced.
• Test your batteries after each charge, allowing at
• Make sure batteries are fully charged before use least two minutes after disconnecting from the
and before storage. charger before taking the measurement. If a
• Disconnect all cables before storage and transport, reading falls below 12.75V, the battery should
to prevent damage to connectors. probably be replaced.
• Keep protective caps in place on connectors, or
joined to each other when cables are connected.
Operations
• After calibration, allow time to acquire simultaneous
Maintenance baseline data from all the instruments at the
• Monitor the DC potential measured on the calibration site. Compare results to ensure all the
electrodes. The lead-chloride gradually leaches out equipment is performing properly. (This process
of the electrodes, and they must be refurbished or also helps to develop a model of the data
replaced from time to time. Consistently high characteristics you can expect during the rest of the
potentials indicate a problem. To test the survey.)
electrodes, put them in a container with a few • Test all hand-held GPS receivers to ensure
centimeters of salt water and measure the uniformity of readings within acceptable variance.
Be aware that map grids may contain errors or
distortions, but the graphics themselves are created
Survey requirements
accurately from photographs. Therefore, test your Ensure that you have all the required tools and
receivers with reference to natural landmarks when equipment before beginning your work:
possible.
• Equipment Checklist and Layout Sheets (see
• When using a compass, keep the area clear of local Appendices D and E for examples)
sources of magnetic distortion such as vehicles, belt
• V8 and other instruments if used, sensors, cables,
buckles, shovels, sensor coils, etc.
etc. per checklist
• During sensor calibration, avoid movement of local
• Tools per checklist
sources of magnetic distortion.
• PC with CompactFlash card reader, if required.
• Take compass readings twice, from opposite
• Setup software, if required (WinTabEd Off-line
directions (two crew members can do this
Editor)
simultaneously).
• Processing software (SSMT2000, SyncTSV, MTEdit,
• Have at least two people record and check the
MTPlot), etc
information on the Layout Sheet, and initial it as
• A supply of CD-R or DVD disks for archiving data.
correct.
85 Chapter 3 Common Operations Survey requirements 85

86 Chapter 3 Common Operations Survey requirements 86
Chapter
Table files are disk files containing the operating
parameters of System 2000.net instruments. They
have several purposes:
• to copy the same settings into multiple instruments
• to save the current state of an instrument so that it
can be configured identically at a later time
• to provide input for data processing
This chapter explains how to use the TblEdit program

on a PC to view, create, and modify table files. It also
explains some useful utility functions of the program.
Table Files and TblEdit
87 Chapter 4 87
88 Chapter 4 TblEdit About table files 88
About table files Startup table files

All the system and user-changeable parameters of If a table file named “startup.tbl” is present on the
System 2000.net instruments are stored in a table in CompactFlash card when the instrument is powered on,
system memory. The parameters can also be saved in a the settings in that file will be loaded into memory
disk file, called a table file, with the extension tbl. automatically. This feature makes it easy to program a
number of instruments with identical settings and also
A table file does not have to contain all possible allows acquisition to begin automatically without
parameters, and may contain unnecessary parameters. having to program the instrument in the field. Startup
Missing parameters are supplied by the instrument table files contain only a subset of the parameters.
when it is powered up. Unnecessary parameters are
ignored. RXUs have fewer parameters than V8s, so
these instruments will simply ignore parameters that Site table files
do not apply.
Table files are necessary for post-acquisition data
Table files are stored in binary format. They can only be processing. The files contain information that the
read by Phoenix software, although they can be processing programs need in order to associate the raw
converted to text files if desired. data with the correct sites, calibration files, and
conditions of acquisition.
The format of table files used by System 2000.net
instruments differs from that used by System 2000 Site table files contain all the parameters, and are
MTU and MTU-A instruments. In order to process MT saved automatically by the instruments. In controlled
data acquired by a V8, the site table file must be source methods, a site file is saved when the
converted to the earlier (Version 1) format. instrument has been recording or is paused and you
choose Standby from the Acquisition menu, or Site • Convert table, calibration, stack result, and
Setup from the Setup menu. In MT or AMT frequency stepping schedule files to text format
acquisition, a site file is saved when recording stops, • Convert site table files to a format compatible with
either because the programmed end time has been SSMT2000 (the MT and AMT data processing
reached or because you chose Setup from the program)
Acquisition menu.
Site files are named in the format ssssHhaa, where:

• ssss is the serial number of the instrument Exploring TblEdit
• H is the month in hexadecimal (1–9, A, B, C)
This section explains the basics of TblEdit:
• h is the day of the month in alphanumeric format
(1–9, a–v) • Starting the program
• aa is an alphabetic code denoting the order of • Understanding the main window, toolbar, and
repeated soundings on the same day (aa, ab, … zz) menus
Starting TblEdit
About TblEdit Start TblEdit as you would any other Windows-based
The TblEdit (“Table Editor”) program is a simple program: either double click a desktop shortcut or
Windows-based program. It allows you to: launch the program from the Start menu.
• View, create, and modify startup table files
• View and modify site table files
89 Chapter 4 TblEdit About TblEdit 89

90 Chapter 4 TblEdit Exploring TblEdit 90
The main window
When you launch the TblEdit program, the main
application window appears (see Fig. 4-1). Fig. 4-2: Menus.
All actions in TblEdit take place in dialog boxes, so you Below them is the toolbar:
can reduce the size of the main window if you want by
dragging the window borders.
Fig. 4-3: Toolbar.
The menus and the toolbar both allow you to perform

the most common tasks. The menus include some
additional tasks that are not available from the toolbar.
At the bottom of the main window is the status bar:
Fig. 4-4: Status bar.
The status bar indicates the state of the program on

the left, and the state of the Caps Lock, Num Lock, and
Fig. 4-1: TblEdit main window. Scroll Lock keys on the right.
Across the top of the main window are the menus:

Menus opens a dialog box in which you can view and change a
subset of parameters controlling:
This section explains the commands available on the
• Data acquisition
menus. Most have toolbar equivalents, explained in the
• Frequency stepping schedules
next section.
• Coil and airloop sensor calibration
The File menu. Four commands and (possibly) several • Current sensor calibration
shortcuts appear on the File menu (see Fig. 4-5). The • Radio network communications
commands allow you to open, save, or rename table
files and exit the program. The shortcuts appear as a The last command, Raw Parameters, opens a dialog
numbered list of recently used files. box in which you can view all instrument parameters by
their code names and change those that are not read-
only. This command is primarily for troubleshooting;
you should not normally have to use it.
Fig. 4-5: The File menu.
The Edit menu. Six commands appear on the Edit

menu (see Fig. 4-6). Each of the first five commands Fig. 4-6: The Edit menu.

The Utilities menu. Five commands appear on the The View menu. Two commands appear on the View
Utilities menu (see Fig. 4-7). The first four commands menu (see Fig. 4-8), allowing you to toggle the display
allow you to print table files, calibration files, stack of the toolbar and the status bar. A checkmark beside
result files, and frequency stepping schedule files. (The the command indicates that the item is currently
“print” commands actually convert the binary files to displayed.
text files that you can then open and print from
Notepad or another text editor.)
The fifth command converts a table file from System

2000.net format to V5 System 2000 format. This Fig. 4-8: The View menu.
conversion is necessary for compatibility with
SSMT2000, the MT and AMT data processing program. The Help menu. The AboutTblEdit command on the
Help menu opens a dialog box that provides program
version information and contact information for
Phoenix Geophysics Ltd.
Tools
Fig. 4-7: The Utilities menu. The toolbar below the menus contains nine tools
corresponding to the most commonly used menu
The commands on the Utilities menu do not have commands. This section explains the icon and purpose
toolbar equivalents. of each tool.
Tool Command
Icon
Open file.
Tool tip
Save file.
Edit Acquisition parameters.
Edit Frequency Stepping parameters.

Status bar message
Edit Coil Calibration parameters.
Fig. 4-9: Hover the mouse pointer over a tool icon to learn its
Edit Current Sensor parameters.
purpose.
Edit Radio network parameters.

To learn the purpose of a tool when using the program,
Edit the raw parameters. hover the mouse pointer over the tool icon and read
the tooltip or the Status bar message. (See Fig. 4-9.)
Open the About TblEdit dialog box.

94 Chapter 4 TblEdit Creating and modifying table files 94
Creating and modifying table To create a new table file:

• From the File menu, choose Save or Save As…
files and give the file a name. (The default is
Most of the parameters that you can modify are startup.tbl.)
described elsewhere in this User Guide. Please read
Chapter 3, “Common Operations,” Chapter 8, “Radio To open an existing file:
Communication,” Chapter 9, “Frequency Stepping” and
1. From the File menu, choose Open, or click on
the chapters describing individual geophysical methods
the toolbar.
to gain an understanding of what values you should use
in your table files. 2. Navigate to the file you want to use and double click
it.
Opening and saving table files

Editing acquisition parameters
When TblEdit is launched, it starts with a complete set
of parameters in memory, so there is no need for a Since the possible values for instrument parameters
“New file” command. will vary according to the geophysical method being
used, it’s important to start by defining the method and
You can modify these default parameters and save setting up the acquisition parameters.
them as a new file, or you can open an existing file on
disk and modify it.
Note In the Acquisition Parameters dialog box,
CS_Record, CS_Pause, and CS_Standby
correspond to the Record, Pause, and Standby
commands on any of the V8 Controlled Source
Acquisition menus.
To edit acquisition parameters:

1. From the Edit menu, choose Acquisition
Parameters… or click on the toolbar.
The Acquisition Parameters dialog box appears (see

Fig. 4-10).
Fig. 4-10: Acquisition Parameters dialog box.
2. Select the Technique (geophysical method) you

want to use.

3. Set the remaining parameters as appropriate for To edit frequency stepping parameters:
your survey. 1. From the Edit menu, choose Frequency Stepping
Warning Remember that table settings saved in a Parameters… or click on the toolbar.
startup.tbl file will be loaded and used
! immediately upon powering the instrument. Use The Frequency Stepping Parameters dialog box appears (see
Fig. 4-11 on page 97).
caution when choosing the Mode Request. Box
Calibration or Sensor Calibration will erase any 2. To set up Auto Stepping, follow the instructions
corresponding files that may be on the
under “Setting up the Auto Stepping frequency
CompactFlash card. CS_Record will start
acquiring data immediately. table” on page 190 and click Calculate Stepping
Table.
3. To designate a saved schedule file for use, select it
Editing frequency stepping from the Freq. stepping control list.
parameters 4. To view a saved schedule file, click Open Schedule
File…, navigate to the TFS file you want to use, and
The Frequency Stepping Parameters dialog box in click Open.
the TblEdit program is almost identical to the
Acquisition Parameters dialog box of the V8. In The Frequency Stepping Schedule spreadsheet displays the
file contents.
addition to letting you choose a saved schedule file or
set up Auto Stepping, the TblEdit dialog box has the 5. If desired, edit the values displayed in the
ability to save a schedule file and to display the Frequency Stepping Schedule spreadsheet. You
contents of a schedule file. can also click Insert Row or Delete Row to
change the schedule.
Note Frequencies that cannot be accurately produced by the
instruments will be highlighted in red in the
spreadsheet. See Chapter 9 for recommended
frequencies.
To save a schedule file:

1. When the Frequency Stepping Schedule
spreadsheet contains the settings you want to save,
click Export Schedule File…
2. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the
file, name it using a numeral greater than or equal
to 2 as the file name and the extension .TFS, and
click Save.
Note If you want to create a large number of schedule files, Fig. 4-11: Frequency Stepping Parameters dialog box.
you can save the files with more meaningful names.
However, you will have to rename such files to
numerical names before an RXU or V8 can use them. Editing coil and loop sensor
calibration parameters
It is important to calibrate sensors before they are
used to acquire data. Although you may not choose to
have an instrument start up in sensor calibration mode,

you can still assign values to the calibration parameters
in the startup table file.
Three parameters need to be set: the sensor type, the

calibration time, and the sensor serial numbers, which
the instrument uses to create calibration file names.
The serial numbers can be omitted at this point if the

instrument is not going to start up in sensor calibration
mode, but they must be supplied before sensor
calibration begins.
To edit coil and loop sensor calibration

parameters:
1. From the Edit menu, choose Coil Calibration… or
click on the toolbar. t

Fig. 4-12: Coil Calibration dialog box.
The Coil Calibration dialog box appears (see Fig. 4-12).
2. Select the Coil Type to be calibrated.
The parameters for corner frequencies and test signal amplitude
and gain are displayed in the first five text boxes and the
calibration file name prefix appears in the three serial number
text boxes. The default calibration multiplier appears in the
Calibration time text box.
3. Edit the Calibration time (x30min) multiplier if mode, you can still assign values to the calibration
necessary, using a value of at least 2. (Use a larger parameters in the startup table file.
value in noisy areas.)
If you are not calibrating, you need to set the gain
4. If the sensor serial numbers are known, add them factor to be used during acquisition.
to the end of the prefix in each H sensor serial
number text box. Four parameters can be set: the sensor type; the
5. If no sensor will be calibrated on an H channel, calibration time; the sensor serial number, which the
delete the contents of the corresponding H sensor instrument uses to create the calibration file name; and
serial number text box. the instrument gain.
The serial number can be omitted at this point if the

Note Be certain that the sensor serial numbers and coil
types are correct and are correctly identified as being instrument is not going to start up in sensor calibration
Hx, Hy, or Hz as they will be connected in the field. An mode, but it must be supplied before sensor calibration
error here means that all data acquired with the or data acquisition begins.
affected sensor(s) will be invalid—a potentially costly
mistake. To edit current sensor calibration parameters:
1. From the Edit menu, choose Current Sensor
Editing the current sensor Settings… or click on the toolbar.
parameters The Current Sensor dialog box appears (see Fig. 4-13).
It is important to calibrate the current sensor before it

is used to acquire data. Although you may not choose
to have an instrument start up in sensor calibration

4. Edit the Calibration time (x12min) multiplier if
necessary, using a value of at least 2 for CMU-1
sensors and at least 20 for Mod CMU-1 sensors.
(Use a larger value in noisy areas.)
Setting gain. It is essential to set the gain correctly
before and during data acquisition. An incorrect setting
can make the data unusable because every record will
be saturated. Table 4-1 shows the peak signal strength
that can be recorded on the current sensor channel at
each gain setting.
Fig. 4-13: Current Sensor dialog box.

Table 4-1: CMU-1 gain factors and signal strength
Peak Current
2. Select the Sensor Type: Mod CMU-1 for high- Gain Setting
power transmitters like the T-200, CMU-1 for other CMU-1 Mod CMU-1
transmitters. 0.25 50A —
The nominal gain and test signal amplitude are displayed in the
1 20A 200A
first two text boxes.
4 5A 100A
3. In the Current sensor S/N text box, type the
prefix CSEN followed by the current sensor serial 16 1.25A 25A
number.
To set the current sensor channel gain:
• Determine the peak current expected from the
transmitter and select the appropriate gain.
Editing communication settings

If your instruments are equipped with the radio option,
then you can set up the parameters for network
communication using TblEdit. See Chapter 8, “Radio
Communication” on page 159 to gain an understanding
of what values you should use in the table file.
To edit communication parameters: Fig. 4-14: Communication Settings dialog box.
1. From the Edit menu, choose Communication 2. Choose the Radio Type according to whether this
Settings… or click on the toolbar. instrument will be the Master or a Slave.
The Communication Settings dialog box appears (see Note If you are saving a startup table file to be used in
Fig. 4-14). multiple instruments, choose Slave as the Radio
Type. There can be only one Master on the network.
3. Choose the Radio Frequency band that is used by

the instruments.
4. Select the Radio power from the drop-down list.

5. Set the Network address to a number from 1 to PC. You can give the file any meaningful name.
65 535. However, to have an instrument use the file
6. Set the Encryption key to a number from 1 to automatically, it must be named “startup.tbl” and it
65 535. must be copied to the \DATA directory of the
CompactFlash card that will be used in the instrument.
7. In the Tx Box S/N text box, type the serial number
of the RXU-TMR to be used.
To use table files in the instruments:
8. In the Ref. Box S/N text box, type the serial
1. Copy the .tbl file(s) to the \DATA directory of the
number of the remote noise reference instrument.
CompactFlash card you will be using in the
9. In the Auxn Box S/N text boxes, type the serial instrument.
numbers of the RXU-3ER instruments from which
2. If you want a .tbl file to be used automatically when
you want to receive data channels.
the instrument is powered on, name the file
Note If you are saving a startup table file to be used in “startup.tbl”.
multiple RXUs, do not complete the Auxn Box S/N 3. When using the V8, if you want to load a table file,
text boxes. An RXU can only acquire 6 channels (3 of choose Load Setup from the Setup menu of any
its own, 2 from the noise reference, and 1 from the
acquisition window and type the file name in the
transmitter monitor.
dialog box.
4. When using an RXU, if you want to load a table file,
Using table files choose Load Table from the Utilities window in
RXUPilot and tap the file name in the list of files.
When you are satisfied with the parameter settings you
have made, save the table file to the hard drive of your
Editing Raw Parameters
The Raw Parameters command opens a dialog box in
which you can view all instrument parameters by their
code names and change those that are not read-only.
This command is primarily for troubleshooting; you
should not normally have to use it.
Warning Modifying parameters incorrectly may produce

invalid results, cause data loss, or may prevent
! data acquisition or processing altogether. Phoenix
Geophysics Ltd. accepts no responsibility for data
loss or invalid results or interpretations based on
parameters incorrectly modified.
DO NOT MODIFY PARAMETERS unless you fully

understand the consequences or are advised by
Phoenix Geophysics Technical Support.
To access raw parameters:

• From the Edit menu, choose Raw Parameters…
Fig. 4-15: Raw Parameters dialog box.
or click on the toolbar.
The Raw Parameters dialog box appears (see Fig. 4-15).

104 Chapter 4 TblEdit Viewing and printing System 2000.net files 104
The default sort order is numeric (by the first TblEdit allows you to convert the files to plain ASCII
column); to sort alphabetically by parameter code, text files, which can then be viewed or printed from a
select Sort by code. text editor such as Notepad or OpenOffice. The text
files are saved with the same file name but with the
To jump directly to a parameter, type its code in the
extension .txt, in the same folder as the original file.
Lookup by code box and click Lookup.
You can change the width of a column by dragging the To convert a System 2000.net binary file to
vertical bar to the right of the column heading. ASCII:
1. From the Utilities menu, choose the Print…
To edit raw parameters: command for the type of file you want to convert
• Scroll to the row containing the code that you want (see Fig. 4-16).
to edit, click in the Value column of that row, and
type the new value.
Viewing and printing System

2000.net files Fig. 4-16: The Print commands on the Utilities menu.
None of the files used by System 2000.net instruments 2. Browse to the folder containing the file(s) you want
are human-readable—they are in binary, or machine- to convert. You can choose more than one file by
readable format. holding down Shift or Ctrl while clicking the file
names.
3. Click Open. program uses the same file name for the converted
4. In Windows Explorer, browse to the folder table files and saves the original table file with the new
containing the original file and open the .txt file(s) extension, .tb2.
you just created. If desired, print the file using your
text editor’s Print command. To convert a table file from System 2000.net
format to V5 System 2000 format:
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Convert Tbl
File(s) To Version 1…
Converting table files to V5 2. Browse to the folder containing the file(s) you want
System 2000 format to convert and select them. You can choose more
than one file by holding down Shift or Ctrl while
System 2000.net table files use 8-character parameter clicking the file names.
codes and contain many more parameters than V5
3. Click Open.
System 2000 table files, which use 4-character codes.
In order to use SSMT2000 to process MT and AMT data 4. When processing data with SSMT2000, choose the
acquired with System 2000.net instruments, you must .tbl files as usual.
convert the table files to the correct format. (The
105 Chapter 4 TblEdit Converting table files to V5 System 2000 format 105
106 Chapter 4 TblEdit Converting table files to V5 System 2000 format 106
Chapter
System 2000.net RXUs are equipped with infrared
transceivers, allowing them to be controlled and
monitored by the RXUPilot™ program running on a
Palm OS™ handheld device.
This chapter explains in general terms the use of the

handheld device and the RXUPilot program. More
specific information is given in the chapters on the
RXU-TM and the RXU-3E.
RXUPilot
107 Chapter 5 107

108 Chapter 5 RXUPilot About Palm OS™ handheld devices 108
About Palm OS™ handheld The stylus acts in a manner similar to a mouse on a PC.
The touch screen allows user input through the use of a
devices special alphabet, called Graffiti™, instead of a
keyboard. It is advisable to learn the Graffiti alphabet
The Palm operating system (OS) is a product of Palm, before attempting to use the RXUPilot software.
Inc., and is widely used in handheld personal digital
assistants (PDAs) such as PalmPilots, Hand Eras, and
Symbol Technologies terminals. Although any Palm OS Additional documentation and
device can be used with the RXUPilot software, most
software
are not suitable for field conditions. For this reason,
Phoenix offers ruggedized terminals from Symbol The manufacturers of the handheld terminals provide
Technologies and ACEECA (Meazura) for use in the their own documentation. Copies are provided as PDF
field. The Meazura terminal is the standard offering; it files on the System 2000.net software CD. PC software
is waterproof (submersible) and operates in for the Meazura terminal is supplied on a CD shipped
temperatures from 0°C to 50°C. Optionally, the Symbol with the terminal. PC software for the SPT1800
Technologies SPT1800 terminal can be purchased. The (SPTDSKEN) is supplied on the System 2000.net
SPT1800 operates from –20°C to 50°C and has a more software CD.
conveniently located infrared port.
The PC software is used to upgrade or reinstall the
Each handheld terminal is equipped with a touch screen RXUPilot program. It is not needed for normal
and special stylus for user input, and an infrared (IR) operation of RXUs.
transceiver for communication with the RXU.
Meazura. The Quick Start Guide for the Meazura
terminal is reproduced in Appendix F on page 311.
Meazura users may also find it helpful to read Chapters
3 and 16 of the Symbol SPT1800 Product Reference • Chapter 1, Getting Started, which explains the
Guide. These chapters explain the Graffiti writing physical controls, use of the stylus, connection of
system and the installation and removal of the charging cradle, and installation of the PC
applications. software.
• Chapter 3, Working with your SPT Terminal,
Symbol SPT1800. Customers who purchase Symbol
terminals should read the Quick Reference Guide and especially pages 3–6 to 3–15, which explain the
Graffiti writing system.
Product Reference Guide provided in Adobe Acrobat
PDF on the System 2000.net software CD. • Chapter 16, Installing and Removing Applications.
Graffiti tutorial. A tutorial on the Graffiti writing system
Refer to the Quick Reference Guide (QRG) for
is included as one of the Palm OS system applications.
information on the following:
Because it is most efficient to use the Graffiti alphabet
• parts of the SPT terminal with the RXUPilot software, customers are advised to
• installing the battery learn the writing system by using the tutorial.
• starting the SPT terminal
• writing with the stylus To use the Graffiti tutorial:
• resetting the SPT terminal
• maintaining the SPT terminal 1. Tap the Applications Launcher icon on the
• troubleshooting the SPT terminal handheld terminal.
Refer to the Product Reference Guide for complete 2. If necessary, change the category to All or
information on the terminal, including most System.
importantly: 3. Tap the Graffiti icon (see Fig. 5-1).
4. Follow the instructions on the handheld screen.

other Palm OS devices) is located on the narrow top
edge. The IR port on the Symbol terminal is located on
the back. (See Fig. 5-2.)
Hold the handheld terminal so that its IR port points

directly at the RXU port, within a metre distance. If
RXUPilot reports the RXU out of range, check that there
is a direct line of sight between the ports, and/or move
the handheld terminal closer to the RXU.
Infrared
Fig. 5-1: Launch the Graffiti tutorial from the Applications Port
Launcher, System category.
If you do not wish to use the Graffiti writing system,

you can use the on-screen keyboards by tapping either
the abc or 123 dots in the bottom corners of the writing
area.
Infrared port Fig. 5-2: Location of IR port on the back of the Symbol terminal.
The infrared (IR) port on the RXU is located between If several instruments are operating close together (in
the E-channel terminals marked E and S (channel 1). a laboratory, for example), it may be necessary to
The IR port on the Meazura terminal (and on most temporarily shield the IR ports of instruments other
than the one you are establishing a connection with. RXUPilot functions are divided into seven groups:
Once communication is established, shielding is not • Instrument address (serial number)
necessary. • GPS status
• Calibration control
Tip Many of the windows in the RXUPilot program take
several seconds to refresh after you make a change, • Communication status
close a dialog box, or update the window. Keep the IR • Acquisition control
ports properly aligned until the terminal beeps to • Station statistics display
indicate completion.
• Utilities
The following sections explain the use of the program

and each functional group in general terms.
About RXUPilot Instructions specific to the RXU-3E and the RXU-TM are
provided in chapters 6 and 7.
RXUPilot is a software program for Palm OS™ handheld
devices that allows you to control and monitor System
2000.net RXUs. Launching RXUPilot
Warning In order to allow complete flexibility, RXUPilot The RXUPilot program is already loaded on the
provides access to all the system parameters in handheld terminal. Refer to the Symbol SPT1800
! the RXU. Care should be taken not to change any Product Reference Guide on the System 2000.net
parameters except as described in this User software CD for instructions on uninstalling or
Guide. Random changes to parameters may cause
reinstalling the program.
operational or data problems that will be difficult
to diagnose or correct.
111 Chapter 5 RXUPilot About RXUPilot 111

Note You must be familiar with the handheld terminal and

the Palm operating system to use RXUPilot. Follow the
recommendations under “Additional documentation
and software” on page 108 before attempting to use
RXUPilot.
To launch RXUPilot:
1. Tap the Applications Launcher icon on the

handheld terminal.
Fig. 5-3: Launch RXUPilot from the Applications Launcher.
2. If necessary, change the category to All or
Phoenix. The program starts and requests an instrument serial number
3. Tap the RXUPilot icon (see Fig. 5-3). (see Fig. 5-4).
Fig. 5-4: RXUPilot at start-up. Fig. 5-5: RXUPilot main window.
4. Enter the serial number of the instrument you want

to communicate with, and tap OK. Updating the display
The main program window appears (see Fig. 5-5). Most windows in the RXUPilot program are populated
with current information when they are opened. From
that time, they do not update automatically; the
information is correct only at the moment that it is
beamed from the RXU. To know the current state of the
instrument, you must update the information manually.

To update an RXUPilot window: To check or change the serial number:
1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap Update. 1. Either tap Address on the RXUPilot main window or
2. Keep the IR ports aligned until the handheld choose Change Box Address from the Options
terminal beeps to indicate all information has been menu in any window.
received. The Box Address dialog box appears:
Viewing and changing RXU serial

number
The RXUPilot program uses the serial number of the
RXU as an address when beaming over the infrared Fig. 5-6: Box Address dialog box.
port. An RXU will not respond to the RXUPilot program
if the RXU serial number is not entered correctly. 2. If necessary, change the RXU serial number. and
tap OK.
When you want to change the RXU that you are
communicating with, change the serial number in the
Address function. Viewing location, GPS status, and
If you encounter Out of IR Range errors even when clock status
holding the handheld terminal close to the RXU port,
An RXU cannot be calibrated, acquire data or control a
check that the serial number in the Address function
transmitter until it is synchronized to GPS signals. GPS
matches the instrument you are working with.
also provides accurate time, latitude, longitude, and
elevation information. RXUPilot allows you to view this The window displays the following read-only
information. information:
Number of satellites acquired. Four satellites must be
To check GPS, clock, and location status:
acquired at least briefly to initiate synchronization and
1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap GPS on determine position. After initial synchronization, the
the RXUPilot main window. number of satellites can vary without affecting the RXU
The GPS Status window appears (see Fig. 5-7). synchronization; it will use its own internal clock.
UTC. “Universal Time Co-ordinated”. This is the UTC
date and time at the moment the parameter was
beamed by the RXU.
Latitude, longitude, and elevation. Latitude is in the
format DDmm.mmm,P and longitude is in the format
DDDmm.mmm,P, where D is degrees, m is minutes,
and P is the compass point (N, E, S, or W). Elevation is
in metres above sea level.
Clock error. If satellite synchronization is lost and then
regained, there may be a an error of a few
Fig. 5-7: GPS Status window.
microseconds in the internal clock. The RXU will correct
this error gradually over several minutes as long as the
2. Keep the IR ports aligned until the handheld
number of satellites remains at four or more.
terminal beeps to indicate all information has been
received.

Clock status. The RXU clock will be in one of four To control calibration:
states: 1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap Cal on
• Uninitialized the RXUPilot main window.
• Set to RTC, the Real Time Clock of the CPU
The Calibration window appears (see Fig. 5-8).
• Aligned to GPS because four or more satellites are
currently acquired
• Aligned to OCXO (oven-controlled crystal
oscillator) because contact has not been maintained
with at least four satellites. The onboard OCXO
allows the instrument to stay synchronized with
other instruments for several hours without
receiving GPS signals.
Controlling calibration
Fig. 5-8: Calibration window.
RXUs must be calibrated before use. Current monitors
used with an RXU-TM must be calibrated using a
calibrated RXU-TM. See Chapters 6 and 7 for further
information.
received.
The illustrations that follow are from an RXU-TM. RXU- 3. Follow the instructions in Chapters 6 and 7 to set up
3E instruments do not offer sensor calibration, since and carry out the calibrations.
they do not use magnetic or current sensors.
Viewing and changing parameters
The View Table function lets you view all operational
parameters within the RXU and also lets you change a
subset of them.
Normally you will not need to use the View Table

function; however, specific instructions on changing
some parameters are provided elsewhere in this Guide
as necessary.
Accessing parameters. There are several hundred Fig. 5-9: Utilities window.
parameters in total. The first step is to transfer all of
them to the handheld terminal. 2. Tap View Table.
3. Read the warning and tap OK.
To transfer all parameters:
The Parameters window appears (see Fig. 5-10).
1. Tap Utilites on the RXUPilot main window.
The Utilities window appears (see Fig. 5-9).

Fig. 5-10: Parameters window. Fig. 5-11: The Parameters window, updated.
4. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap Update. The parameters appear in alphabetical order. You can
scroll through them in order or randomly.
The handheld terminal beeps once per second for about 15
seconds while parameters are transferred. When the transfer is
complete, the display is refreshed (see Fig. 5-11 on page 118). To access parameters in alphabetical order:
• Press the Scroll Buttons on the handheld terminal
or tap the up and down arrows at the right of the
window.
To access parameters randomly:

1. In the Graffiti text input area, write the first
character of the parameter name.
The list scrolls to show the first parameter in the alphabetical list The Edit Parameters dialog box appears, showing the current
starting with that letter. value of the parameter (see Fig. 5-12).
2. Tap the down arrow or press a Scroll Button if

necessary until the parameter you want to access
appears in the window.
Changing parameter values. Parameters that are read- Fig. 5-12: Editing the SNTX parameter.
only are marked with the ® symbol beside the value.
Only parameter values not marked with the ® symbol 3. Change the current value to the new value.
can be changed. 4. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and and tap
Send.
Warning In order to allow complete flexibility, RXUPilot
provides access to all the system parameters in The RXU parameter is updated with the new value.
! the RXU. Care should be taken not to change any
parameters except as described in this User
Guide. Incorrect parameter settings may cause Saving parameters (startup.tbl)
operational or data problems that will be difficult
to diagnose or correct. An RXU can be programmed to start up in a
predetermined mode when it is powered on. If a special
To change a parameter value: file, called startup.tbl, is on the CompactFlash card
when the instrument is powered on, the contents of the
1. Access the parameter name as just described.
file will be read and the instrument parameters and
2. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap the mode will be set accordingly. The intent of the startup
parameter name. file is to allow acquisition times and parameters to be
set up so that operation in the field will be automatic.

The startup.tbl file can be created on a PC and saved
on the CF card, or the RXU can be programmed and the
settings can be saved using RXUPilot.
The startup.tbl file contains only the user-changeable

parameters, not the entire list that is visible in the
View Table function. Also, in the acquisition start time
parameter (STIM), only the time, not the date, is
saved.
Note It is not advisable to save a startup.tbl file when the Fig. 5-13: Utilities window.
instrument is in a calibration mode, because any
existing calibration file on the disk will be erased as
3. Tap Save Table, read the warning, and tap Yes.
soon as the instrument is next powered on.
The RXU saves the current settings in a startup.tbl file on the CF
card.
To save parameters in a startup.tbl file:
1. Set all the parameters and the mode (Record,
Setup, Standby, etc.) as you want them to be when Loading saved parameters
the RXU is next powered on.
If a startup.tbl file exists on the CF card, it will be
2. From the main window of RXUPilot, tap Utilities. loaded when the instrument is powered on. However,
The Utilities window appears (see Fig. 5-13). changes to the parameters made after that point do
not affect the file (unless you use the Save Table
command described earlier). If you make changes to
the RXU settings and then decide you want to revert to
the state saved in the startup.tbl file, you can do so by
loading the file from disk into memory.
To load saved parameters:

1. From the main window of RXUPilot, tap Utilities.
2. Tap Load Table, read the warning, and tap Yes.
The RXU replaces the current settings with those in the
startup.tbl file.
Fig. 5-14: Unit Status window.
Viewing instrument status The window displays the following read-only

information:
RXUPilot provides quick access to several critical
parameters, such as battery voltage, internal Hardware. This text string is a code for the instrument
temperature, and space available on the CF card. type and version. If you experience problems with the
instrument, you may be asked to provide this
To view instrument status: information to Phoenix Technical Support.
1. From the main window of RXUPilot, tap Utilities. S/W Version. This text string is a code for the firmware
2. Tap Status. installed in the instrument. If you experience problems
with the instrument, you may be asked to provide this
The Unit Status window appears (see Fig. 5-14).
information to Phoenix Technical Support.

Battery 1. The voltage of the first external battery, as 3. If the temperature remains high, turn the
measured by the instrument. instrument off for 15 minutes to let it cool down.
Battery 2. If two external batteries are connected using GPS FPGA. The status of the GPS subsystem. Any value
a special cable, then this value is the voltage of the other than “Loaded” indicates a problem; contact
second external battery. If only one external battery is Phoenix Technical Support.
connected using the standard cable, then this value is
Front End FPGAs. The status of the input subsystems.
the same as the Battery 1 reading.
Any value other than “All loaded” indicates a problem;
Battery 3. This parameter is reserved for future use. contact Phoenix Technical Support.
Disregard any value shown.
DSP Status: The status of the Digital Signal Processors.
Temperature. The internal temperature of the Any value other than “All loaded” indicates a problem;
instrument. If the instrument temperature nears 60°C, contact Phoenix Technical Support.
it must be cooled or damage may result.
Disk Free Space. The amount of storage space in
megabytes available on the CF card.
To cool an instrument:
1. Take the instrument out of its canvas case, position
it with the terminals uppermost to maximize the Setting up radio communication
surface exposed to the air, and shade the
instrument from the sun. If the RXU is part of a radio network, you can set up
the parameters governing wireless communication and
2. Make sure air can flow freely around the instrument
monitor network status. See “Radio Communication”
case.
on page 159 for further information.
To access radio communication parameters: The window displays the following read-only
1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap Comm information:
on the RXUPilot main window. Network Status. If the RXU is communicating over the
The Radio Comm Status window appears (see Fig. 5-15). The radio network, the Status will be Up. If not, it will be
radio type is shown in the window title. Down. It is normal for the status to alternate between
Up and Down several times when the network is
initializing.
IP Address. The Internet Protocol address assigned to
the instrument, based on the instrument serial number.
Unit Address. The radio’s unit address, assigned by the
master radio. If the unit address is zero, the instrument
is not yet on the network.
Maximum Slaves. If this radio is the master, then it will
report the number of slaves that have been configured.
This value provides a quick check of the total number
Fig. 5-15: Radio Comm Status window.
of instruments in the field that are communicating with
2. Keep the IR ports aligned until the handheld the master. If this radio is a slave, then Maximum
terminal beeps to indicate all information has been Slaves is not applicable (N/A).
received. The Radio Comm Status window also displays the
following editable information. See Chapter 8, “Radio
Communication” for a full explanation.

Tx Power. Radio’s Transmit Power setting. 4. If required, change the Encryption Key. All instru-
ments must use the same key.
Network Addr. Radio Network Address. All units must
have the same Radio Network Address. If other instruments are set up on the Network, the Network
Status will change from Down to Up.
Encryption Key. Radio Encryption Key. All units must
have the same Encryption Key.
Mstr Rng/Brng. Master range (Rng) in metres and
Using master bearing to aim
bearing (Brng) in degrees from true north, or from directional antennas
magnetic north if the DECL (declination) parameter is
not zero. If you are using directional antennas on slave radios,
they must be accurately aimed toward the master, or
Master or Slave status. Only one radio can be the radio communication will be poor or non-existent. If
master; all others must be slaves. communication is established, you can read the Master
bearing from the Radio Comm Status window as
To set up radio communication: described on page 124. However, if no communication
1. If this instrument is to be the Master radio, tap is established but the master radio’s position is known,
Master. Otherwise, tap Slave. you can input the master’s latitude and longitude and
2. Set the Tx Power according to local conditions: the RXU will calculate the range and bearing.
lower power for low path loss, higher power for See “Viewing and changing parameters” on page 117
greater path loss. for instructions on how to use the View Table function
3. If required, change the Network Addr. All instru- in this procedure.
ments must use the same address.
To enter the master radio position: the quality of communication with those instruments.
1. From the RXUPilot main window, tap Utilities. The RXU sends a “ping” (a data packet requesting
acknowledgement) every minute to test the network. If
2. Tap View Table.
network quality is poor, then several minutes may pass
3. Read the warning and tap OK. between successful pings. You can monitor the network
4. Align the IR ports and tap Update. quality from the Radio Comm Status window.
5. When the window is refreshed, change the
MSTRLAT and MSTRLNG parameters to the To monitor network quality:
latitude and longitude of the master radio. 1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap
Remotes on the Radio Comm Status main
Within five seconds, the RXU will calculate the master radio
range and bearing. window.
6. Return to the Radio Comm Status window and The Remote Units window appears (see Fig. 5-16 on
page 126).
read the calculated range and bearing (Mstr Rng/
Brng).
7. Use a compass to aim the directional antenna
accurately at the calculated bearing.
Monitoring radio network quality

If you have set up an RXU-3ER to receive statistics
from other RXUs (normally the transmitter monitor and
the remote noise reference), you may want to monitor

Controlling data acquisition
When the RXUs have been set up for the correct
geophysical method and radio contact has (optionally)
been established, you can control acquisition of data by
the RXU.
The controls allow you to choose a geophysical method

and start, stop, or pause recording. You can also enter
a Standby mode that closes the data files for the
current station without changing other parameters. You
Fig. 5-16: Remote Units window. can then start a new record set at the current location,
or move to the next station and start recording there.
terminal beeps to indicate all information has been Note You must stop acquisition (which puts the RXU into
received. Setup mode) before you can change settings or
parameters in the other windows of RXUPilot.
If network communication is good, then each remote
instrument that is to send statistics will be listed, and
To control data acquisition:
the time of the last ping will be within one or two
minutes. If network communication is poor or there are 1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap Acquire
other problems, the time of the last ping will be several on the RXUPilot main window.
minutes or the instrument may not be listed at all. The Controlled Source Acquisition window appears:
Viewing station statistics
When data acquisition is in progress, you can monitor
the statistics from any of the channels (local or remote)
that are being acquired by an instrument.
1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap Stats on
the RXUPilot main window.
The Station Statistics window appears:
Fig. 5-17: Controlled Source Acquisition window.

received.
3. Tap the commands in the window to control data
acquisition.
Note The geophysical methods available are controlled by

the licences you have purchased. Methods you have
Fig. 5-18: Station Statistics window.
not purchased will not appear in the list of available
methods.

2. Keep the IR ports aligned until the handheld of the instrument: CSRecord (Controlled Source
terminal beeps to indicate all information has been Record), Standby, or Setup. The second line (Present
received. Freq) displays the value from the frequency-stepping
table that is currently in use. The two arrows are used
Enabling continuous update. Because data is acquired
for scrolling (see the next section). Beneath the arrows
continuously, it is useful to have the statistics window
are the station statistics themselves, in tabular format:
updated automatically. Otherwise, you must tap
Update each time you want to refresh the display. • Freq is the frequency for which statistics are
displayed and applies to all columns in the table.
To enable continous updating: • Time is the UTC time of the last stack included in
the calculation and applies to all columns in the
1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap the
table.
Continuous checkbox on the Station Statistics
window. • SnCh is the Serial Number of the instrument, a
slash, and the number of the Channel. Each Sn/Ch
2. Keep the IR ports aligned.
pair serves as a heading for the two columns below
The window will be updated approximately every four seconds it.
and a beep will sound. • Ampl is the Amplitude of the signal in volts
3. If the Mode changes to Out of Range, statistics followed by the percent standard deviation. Micro-,
cannot be transferred because the IR ports are not milli-, and kilo- are indicated by u, m, and k,
aligned or are too far apart. Realign the ports and respectively.
keep them close together. • Phse is the Phase of the signal in degrees followed
by its standard deviation in degrees.
Interpreting station statistics. The top line of the
• Rho is the Apparent Resistivity in ohm metres
Station Statistics window displays the current Mode
followed by the percent standard deviation. Micro-,
milli-, and kilo- are indicated by u, m, and k, Note If Continuous updating is enabled, pressing the Scroll
respectively. Buttons will disable it. Tapping the left or right arrow
on the screen, however, does not affect the state of
Scrolling through station statistics. You can view the
Continuous updating.
statistics in real time as they are calculated, or you can
review statistics that were calculated for frequencies
recorded earlier in the frequency-stepping schedule.
The window displays only two channels at a time. You Installing RXUPilot upgrades
can scroll through all the channels that are being
From time to time, Phoenix may release upgrades to
acquired by the instrument.
the RXUPilot program. There are two ways to install the
upgrade:
To review statistics for other frequencies:
• Use the Palm Desktop software provided with your
• Press the up or down Scroll Buttons on the
handheld terminal to install the new version at the
handheld terminal to cycle through the frequencies
next HotSync
that have been recorded.
• Beam the program from one handheld terminal to
another.
To review statistics for other channels:
• Tap either the left or right arrow on the Station In either case, the program will automatically be placed
Statistics window to scroll through the channels. in the Phoenix category of the terminal’s Applications
Launcher.
Refer to the instructions provided with your handheld

terminal to learn how to use the Desktop software and
129 Chapter 5 RXUPilot Installing RXUPilot upgrades 129

130 Chapter 5 RXUPilot Installing RXUPilot upgrades 130
how to beam a program from one handheld terminal to
another.
Chapter
This chapter explains the use of the RXU-3E receiver,
including:
• Calibration
• Radio setup
• Channel setup (local and remote)
• Operation
The RXU-3E Receiver
131 Chapter 6 131

132 Chapter 6 The RXU-3E About the RXU-3E 132
About the RXU-3E To shut down the RXU-3E:

• Press the POWER switch down (toward the POWER
The RXU-3E is a two- or three-channel receiver label) and release it.
designed to augment the channels acquired by a V8. It
can be configured as a station receiver or a remote Warning When shutting down the RXU-3E, always wait until
noise reference. shutdown is complete (the LED goes out) before
! disconnecting the battery.
The RXU is controlled and monitored using the RXUPilot
program on a handheld terminal. Read Chapter 5,
“RXUPilot”, before operating the RXU-3E.
If a radio network is operating, the RXU can also be

Calibrating the RXU-3E
controlled and monitored from a V8. Before each survey begins, instruments must be
calibrated. Once the equipment is set up, the process
takes about 10 minutes. Each calibration must be
Starting and shutting down the completed in a single session; it cannot be interrupted
RXU-3E and resumed. Because calibration requires GPS
satellite lock, it is usually done outdoors. However, if
To start the RXU-3E: the GPS antenna can be positioned outdoors and
• Press the red POWER switch on the top of the connected to the RXU with an extended cable, then the
instrument to the ON position and release it. calibration can be done indoors.
After a short delay, the red LED between the N and S terminals Calibration is independent from operation: once an
will flash, then light steadily for about 30s. instrument is calibrated it can be used for any of the
geophysical methods and any acquisition parameters. Tools and equipment required:
The instrument uses the calibration results and the • RXU to be calibrated
operator’s gain and filter settings to calculate • Battery and cable
instrument response for any filter settings that may be • GPS antenna and cable
used.
• Handheld terminal and RXUPilot software
The RXU stores the resulting calibration file in the \CAL
directory on its CompactFlash disk. The file is named To calibrate an RXU-3E:
ssss.CLB, where ssss is the serial number of the RXU. 1. Connect the GPS antenna to the RXU as described
Do not rename, move, or delete the directory or the on page 24.
calibration file. 2. Connect the battery to the RXU as described on
No additional equipment except the handheld terminal page 20.
is needed to perform a calibration. 3. Power up the RXU by pushing the red POWER switch
up to the ON position and releasing it.
Tip For best results, the instrument should be at operating
After a brief delay, the LED indicator between the North and
temperature when you start the calibration. In normal
South E-line terminals will light steadily for about 30s, then start
ambient conditions, an instrument will reach a stable
flashing.
operating temperature 10–15 minutes after it is
powered on. In cold weather, allow more time before 4. Launch the RXUPilot program.
you start the calibration. To learn the internal
temperature, select View Table from the Utilities 5. Check GPS status. Wait until the RXU is synchro-
window and examine the TEMP parameter. nized to GPS.
6. From the RXUPilot main window, tap Cal.
The Calibration window appears:
133 Chapter 6 The RXU-3E Calibrating the RXU-3E 133

134 Chapter 6 The RXU-3E Calibrating the RXU-3E 134
Fig. 6-1: Calibration window before instrument calibration. Fig. 6-2: Instrument (Box) calibration in progress.
7. Tap Box Cal. Tip If Current Mode is Box Cal but the Box Cal status line
If the RXU is synchronized to GPS, calibration begins
displays a message other than In progress, it is likely
immediately (see Fig. 6-2 on page 134). because GPS synchronization has not been achieved.
Double check the GPS status window.
8. After about 10 minutes, tap Update periodically to

see if calibration is complete. If calibration
completed successfully, the Box Cal status line will
display Cal file present (see Fig. 6-3).
To cancel a calibration:
• In the Calibration window, tap Stop.
The calibration is aborted and the RXU returns to Setup mode.
Setting up radio
communication
This section explains how to set up the RXU to
Fig. 6-3: Instrument (Box) calibration completed.
communicate with other instruments on a network. See
Chapter 8 for complete information on System
9. Tap Stop to end calibration and return to Setup
2000.net radio, and follow those instructions to connect
mode.
the instrument and antenna before beginning.
Cancelling a calibration Setting up the network

You can cancel a calibration that is in progress.
Use the RXUPilot program on the handheld terminal to
However, if you do so, there will be no calibration
set up the radio network.
file for the instrument. Starting a calibration erases
any corresponding existing files; cancelling a
calibration writes no new files. The instrument will have
to be recalibrated before use.
135 Chapter 6 The RXU-3E Setting up radio communication 135

To set up the network: 4. If required, change the Network Addr, keeping the
1. Aim the IR port at the RXU IR port and tap Comm IR ports aligned. All instruments must use the same
on the RXUPilot main window. address.
5. If required, change the Encryption Key, keeping
The Communication Status window appears (see Fig. 6-4).
the IR ports aligned. All instruments must use the
same key.
If other instruments are set up on the Network, the Network
Acquiring remote channels

An RXU can acquire statistics from remote channels
and incorporate them into its own calculations.
Typically, three remote channels will be acquired: one
from the transmitter monitor (RXU-TM) and two from
Fig. 6-4: Communication Status window.
the remote noise reference (an RXU-3E). However, the
channels could come from other RXU-3E or V8
2. If this instrument is to be the Master radio, tap
instruments, to a maximum of 6 channels (including
Master. Otherwise, tap Slave.
local channels).
3. Set the Tx Power according to local conditions:
lower power for low path loss, higher power for Before the RXU can acquire these channel statistics,
greater path loss. you must assign the serial numbers of the instruments
performing each function.
To acquire remote channels:
1. Align the IR ports and on the RXUPilot main
window, tap Acquire.
The Controlled Source Acquisition window appears (see
Fig. 6-5 on page 137).
Fig. 6-6: Configure Remotes window.
3. To the right of the instrument you want to

configure, tap Set.
4. In the dialog box that appears, enter the serial
number of the remote instrument and tap OK. (See
Fig. 6-5: Controlled Source Acquisition window. Figs. 6-7, 6-8, and 6-9 on page 138.)
2. Tap Remotes.
The Configure Remotes window appears (see Fig. 6-6),
displaying the serial numbers of the Transmitter Monitor (Tx
Controller), the remote Noise Reference, and up to five
remote RXU-3ER and/or V8-R instruments (Remote 1 through
Remote 5).

138 Chapter 6 The RXU-3E Setting up local electric channels 138
Fig. 6-9: First Remote RXU or V8 serial number dialog box.
Fig. 6-7: Transmitter Monitor serial number dialog box. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining remotes,
remembering that the RXU is limited to six channels
total, including its own local channels.
Setting up local electric

channels
This section explains how to connect electrodes to the
Fig. 6-8: Remote Noise Reference serial number dialog box. RXU. For general techniques and instructions on
installing electrodes and setting up the instrument in
the field, see Chapter 3.
It is important to connect the channel electrodes to the Note Two separate instruments cannot share an electrode.
correct terminals on the instrument. When electrodes If two instruments need to share the same electrode
are shared, each pair of terminals forms a channel. The location, install two electrodes separated by at least a
channels are marked 1, 2, and 3 on the side of the metre, to prevent cross-talk.
instrument below the terminals. When the E channel
dipoles are not parallel to the transmitter dipole, the
dipole closest to the transmitter should be connected
as channel 1. If the E channels are parallel to the Operating and monitoring the
transmitter dipole, adopt a consistent method for
designating channel order for all instruments.
RXU-3E
This section explains the remaining tasks in setting up
To set up local E channels: a station and operating the instrument.
1. Determine the location of the station electrodes and
place the RXU-3E near one of the inner electrodes. To finish site installation and operate the
2. Install a ground electrode and connect it to the RXU-3E:
RXU-3E. 1. Connect the GPS antenna.
3. Install the channel electrodes and connect them to 2. Connect the radio antenna, if used.
the RXU-3E, being careful to use the correct 3. Connect the battery.
terminals.
4. Power up the RXU-3E by pushing the red POWER
switch up to the ON position and releasing it.
139 Chapter 6 The RXU-3E Operating and monitoring the RXU-3E 139
140 Chapter 6 The RXU-3E Operating and monitoring the RXU-3E 140
After a brief delay, the LED indicator between the North and for further information. Alternatively, control and
South E-line terminals will light steadily for about 30s, then start
monitor the RXU from a V8 over a radio network.
flashing.
See Chapter 3, “Common Operations” and the
5. Use the RXUPilot program to control data acqui- chapters on individual geophysical methods for
sition and monitor station statistics. See Chapter 5 instructions.
Chapter
This chapter explains the use of the RXU-TM
transmitter monitor, including:
• Calibration
• Radio setup
• Field setup
• Frequency stepping setup
• Operation
The RXU-TM Transmitter Monitor

and CMU-1 Current Sensor
141 Chapter 7 141
142 Chapter 7 The RXU-TM About the RXU-TM and CMU-1 142
About the RXU-TM and CMU-1 Starting and shutting down the
RXU-TM
The RXU-TM is a single channel instrument designed to
monitor and/or control the output of a Phoenix current
To start the RXU-TM:
source (transmitter), in conjunction with the CMU-1
Current Sensor. • Press the red POWER switch on the top of the
instrument to the ON position and release it.
The RXU-TM is controlled and monitored using the
RXUPilot program on a handheld terminal. Read After a short delay, the red LED between the N and S terminals
will flash, then light steadily for about 30s.
Chapter 5, “RXUPilot”, before using the RXU-TM.
If the instrument is radio-equipped, it can also be To shut down the RXU-TM:

controlled from a V8 on the network. • Press the POWER switch down (toward the POWER
label) and release it.
The CMU-1 current sensor is made in two versions,
with different sensitivities. Sensors with serial numbers Warning When shutting down the RXU-TM, always wait
from 1000 to 1999 are for use with low- to moderate- until shutdown is complete (the LED goes out)
power transmitters such as the T-3, T-4, and T-30. ! before disconnecting the battery.
These sensors can be used with a maximum current of
50A. Sensors with serial numbers from 9000 to 9999
are for use with high-power transmitters such as the
T-200. These sensors can be used with a maximum
current of 200A.
Calibrating the equipment serial number of the RXU. Current sensor calibration
files are named CSENssss.CLC, where ssss is the serial
Before each survey begins, instruments must be number of the current sensor. Do not rename, move, or
calibrated. Once the equipment is set up, the process delete the directory or the calibration files.
takes about 10 minutes for the instrument and half an
No additional equipment except the handheld terminal
hour or more for the current sensor. Each calibration
is needed to perform a calibration.
must be completed in a single session; it cannot be
interrupted and resumed. Because calibration requires
GPS satellite lock, it is usually done outdoors. However, Calibrating the RXU-TM
if the GPS antenna can be positioned outdoors and
connected to the RXU with an extended cable, then the Tip For best results, the instrument should be at operating
calibration can be done indoors. temperature when you start the calibration. In normal
ambient conditions, an instrument will reach a stable
Calibration is independent from operation: once an operating temperature 10–15 minutes after it is
instrument is calibrated it can be used for any of the powered on. In cold weather, allow more time before
geophysical methods and any acquisition parameters. you start the calibration. To learn the internal
The instrument uses the calibration results and the temperature, select View Table from the Utilities
window and examine the TEMP parameter.
operator’s gain and filter settings to calculate
instrument response for any filter settings that may be
used. Tools and equipment required:
• RXU to be calibrated
The RXU stores the resulting calibration files in the \CAL
• Battery and cable
directory on its CompactFlash disk. The instrument
calibration file is named ssss.CLB, where ssss is the • GPS antenna and cable
143 Chapter 7 The RXU-TM Calibrating the equipment 143

• Handheld terminal and RXUPilot software
To calibrate an RXU-TM:
1. Connect the GPS antenna to the RXU as described
on page 24.
2. Connect the battery to the RXU as described on
page 20.
3. Ensure that a CompactFlash disk has been installed.
4. Power up the RXU by pushing the red POWER switch
up to the ON position and releasing it. Fig. 7-1: Calibration window before instrument calibration.
5. Launch the RXUPilot program.
6. Check GPS status. Wait until the RXU is synchro- 8. If the Current Mode is not Setup, exit the
nized to GPS. Calibration window, open the Acquire window,
and tap Stop. Then return to the Calibration
7. From the RXUPilot main window, tap the Cal
window.
button.
9. Tap the Box Cal button.
The Calibration window appears (see Fig. 7-1 on page 144)
If the RXU is synchronized to GPS, calibration begins
immediately (see Fig. 7-2).
Fig. 7-2: Instrument (Box) calibration in progress. Fig. 7-3: Instrument (Box) calibration completed.
Tip If Current Mode is Box Cal but the Box Cal status line
displays a message other than In progress, it is likely mode.
because GPS synchronization has not been achieved.
Double check the GPS status window.
Calibrating the CMU-1 sensor
10. After about 10 minutes, tap the Update button
periodically to see if calibration is complete. If The process is very similar to instrument calibration,
calibration completed successfully, the Box Cal but takes at least 25 minutes. In electrically noisy
status line will display Cal file present (see conditions, a longer calibration is beneficial. Current
Fig. 7-3). sensors designed for use with high-output transmitters
such as the T-200 (“CMU-1 (mod)”) require up to four
hours for proper calibration.

The RXU-TM must already be calibrated before using it Note Do not connect the two-way cable to a
to calibrate a current sensor. transmitter. Such a connection disables the
calibration current generator, preventing valid
Note Newer models of the Phoenix T-4 current source have calibration.
a CMU-1 sensor built in.
Do not put any wires through the current sensor
aperture. Power the T-4, with output turned off.
To prepare for calibrating the current sensor: 7. Power up the RXU-TM by pushing the red POWER
switch up to the ON position and releasing it.
1. Choose a location for calibration where the current
sensor can be located several metres away from 8. Launch the RXUPilot program.
any current-carrying wires or sources of 9. Check GPS status. Make sure the RXU-TM is
electromagnetic noise. synchronized to GPS.
2. Connect the GPS antenna to the RXU-TM as
described on page 24. To calibrate the current sensor:
3. Connect the battery to the RXU-TM as described on 1. From the RXUPilot main window, tap the Cal
page 20. button.
4. Ensure that a CompactFlash disk has been installed. The Calibration window appears (see Fig. 7-4).
5. Make a note of the current sensor serial number, or
the T-4 serial number.
6. Connect the current sensor (CMU-1) to the RXU-TM
using a two-way (6273B0) cable, or connect the T-4
to the RXU-TM using a 62951 cable.
Fig. 7-4: Calibration window before sensor calibration. Fig. 7-5: Sensor Calibration window.
2. If the Current Mode is not Setup, tap Stop to 4. If the Serial # shown is not that of the sensor you
return to Setup mode. are calibrating, tap the Change button to the right
3. Tap Sensor Cal. of it.
The Sensor Calibration window appears (see Fig. 7-5). The Sensor Serial Number dialog box appears:

Fig. 7-7: Sensor Gain dialog box.
Fig. 7-6: Sensor Serial Number dialog box.

7. Set the Signal Amp (calibration test signal
5. If you are calibrating an external CMU-1, edit the amplitude) to –0.05 for the CMU-1 or T-4, or to
serial number to match the sensor you are –0.10 for the CMU-1 (mod) (see Fig. 7-8).
calibrating and tap OK.
If you are calibrating a CMU-1 built in to a T-4,

enter “T4-” plus the serial number of the T-4 trans-
mitter.
6. In a similar way, set the Sensor Gain to 100 for
the CMU-1 or T-4, or to 5 for the CMU-1 (mod) (see
Fig. 7-7).
Fig. 7-8: Test Signal Amplitude dialog box.
8. Set the calibration Time (x 0.2 hr) to at least 2 for
the CMU-1 or T-4, or to at least 20 for the CMU-1
(mod) (see Fig. 7-9).
Fig. 7-10: Sensor calibration in progress.
10. After the scheduled calibration time has passed,

update the Calibration window and verify that the
Fig. 7-9: Sensor Calibration Multiplier dialog box.
Sensor Cal status reads Cal file present (see
Fig. 7-11).
9. Tap Sensor Cal.
Calibration of the current sensor begins immediately (see mode.
Fig. 7-10).

150 Chapter 7 The RXU-TM Setting up radio communication 150
To cancel a calibration:
• In the Calibration window, tap Stop.
The calibration is aborted and the RXU-TM returns to Setup
mode.
Setting up radio
communication
Fig. 7-11: Sensor calibration completed. This section explains how to set up the RXU-TM to
communicate with other instruments on a network. See
Chapter 8 for complete information on System
Cancelling a calibration 2000.net radio, and follow those instructions to connect
You can cancel a calibration that is in progress. the instrument and antenna before beginning.
However, if you do so, there will be no calibration
file for the instrument or sensor that was being
calibrated. Starting a calibration erases any
Setting up the network
corresponding existing file; cancelling a calibration Use the RXUPilot program on the handheld terminal to
writes no new file. The instrument or sensor will have set up the radio network.
to be recalibrated before use.
To set up the network: 4. Set the Tx Power according to local conditions:
1. Aim the IR port at the RXU-TM IR port and tap the lower power for low path loss, higher power for
Comm button on the RXUPilot main window. greater path loss.
5. If required, change the Network Addr. All instru-
The Communication Status window appears (see Fig. 7-12).
ments must use the same address.
6. If required, change the Encryption Key. All instru-
ments must use the same key.
If other instruments are set up on the Network, the Network
Setting up the RXU-TM,

current sensor, and
Fig. 7-12: Communication Status window. transmitter
2. Keep the IR ports aligned as you complete the next This section explains how to make various connections
steps. to the RXU and transmitter. For general techniques and
instructions on installing electrodes and setting up the
3. If this instrument is to be the Master radio, tap
instrument in the field, see Chapter 3.
Master. Otherwise, tap Slave.
151 Chapter 7 The RXU-TM Setting up the RXU-TM, current sensor, and transmitter 151
It is important to connect the current monitor correctly. to Tx negative electrode to Tx positive electrode
Ensure that the transmitter electrode wires are
correctly identified as positive or negative, and that the Tinned
transmitter wire passing through the current monitor – + copper
aperture passes in the correct direction, as marked on Transmitter braid
the sensor. Use a length of tinned copper braid
grounded at one end only to serve as a Faraday shield
against electrical pick-up from the transmitter wire.
CMU-1
Follow the instructions in the User Guide for the
Two-way
transmitter you are using to set it up with low- GPS cable
resistance current electrodes and proper grounding. 12V RXU-TM (6273B0)
Newer T-4 transmitters have an internal CMU-1 current

monitor. Refer to the T-4 User Guide for instructions. Fig. 7-13: RXU-TM, CMU-1, and transmitter setup.
Note Do not turn on the transmitter or connect the positive

electrode cable to the transmitter until you have set
up the current sensor.
3. Connect the battery to the RXU-TM as described on
page 20.
Output 4. Ensure that a CompactFlash disk has been installed.
terminals
(to loop) 5. If you are using a newer T-4 transmitter with built-
+ +
T-4 in CMU-1, then connect the RXU-TM to the T-4
– – using cable number 62951 and skip to step 13.
BP24/72
Cable 6. If you are using an external CMU-1, connect the
(62951) current sensor (CMU-1) to the RXU-TM using one
pigtail of a two-way (6273B0) cable.
GPS 7. Thread the positive transmitter electrode cable
12V RXU-TM
through a 30cm length of tinned copper braid.
8. Thread the cable and braid through the aperture of
Fig. 7-14: RXU-TM and T-4 transmitter setup. the current sensor, in the direction indicated by the
TX+ marking on the sensor.
To set up the RXU-TM and current sensor: 9. Connect the positive electrode cable to the trans-
1. See Figure 7-13 for an illustration of the completed mitter.
setup using an external CMU-1. See Figure 7-14 for 10. Ensure that the tinned braid extends approximately
an illustration of the completed setup using a T-4 equally on either side of the sensor aperture.
with internal CMU-1.
11. Connect the braid to the transmitter ground
2. Connect the GPS antenna to the RXU-TM as electrode.
described on page 24.
154 Chapter 7 The RXU-TM Operating and monitoring the RXU-TM 154
12. Connect the RXU-TM to the transmitter’s external Setting up frequency stepping
control terminal using the second pigtail of the two-
way cable. This section explains how to use the RXUPilot program
13. Power up the RXU-TM by pushing the red POWER to set up automatic frequency stepping.
switch up to the ON position and releasing it. Frequency stepping can be controlled by a schedule file
After a brief delay, the LED indicator between the North and saved on the RXU-TM CompactFlash card, or by setting
South E-line terminals will light steadily for about 30s, then start the value of a number of parameters within the
flashing. RXU-TM. See Chapter 9, “Frequency Stepping”, for
further information.
Operating and monitoring the To set up file-based frequency stepping:

1. Launch RXUPilot and tap Utilities.
RXU-TM 2. Tap View Table and update the parameters.
You can use the RXUPilot program to control data 3. If the value of the RQST parameter is not 1, change
acquisition and monitor station statistics locally. See it to 1, which puts the RXU-TM into Setup Mode.
Chapter 5 for further information. Alternatively, control 4. Change the value of the AUTO parameter to match
and monitor the RXU from a V8 over a radio network. the name of the schedule file you want to use.
See the chapters on individual geophysical methods for
instructions. For example, if you want to use schedule file 3.TFS,
change the value of AUTO to 3.
When you begin recording data, the RXU-TM will control the 4. Change each of the following parameters to suitable
transmitter using the frequency stepping table contained in the values, as explained in Chapter 9, “Frequency
selected schedule file.
Stepping”:
To set up parameter-based frequency stepping: • WFRM, the waveform code
1. Launch RXUPilot and tap Utilities. • FRQ0 to FRQ19, non-pattern and pattern
frequencies
2. Tap View Table and update the parameters.
• FEND, the approximate lowest frequency
3. If the value of the RQST parameter is not 1, change
it to 1, which puts the RXU-TM into Setup Mode. • FPOC, frequencies per octave
• TPFR, minimum time per frequency
• CPFR, minimum cycles per frequency
• TTOT, total duration of schedule in seconds
• CRMX, maximum current at low frequencies
• FCMX, current roll-off corner frequency
5. Change the value of the AUTO parameter to 1.
When you begin recording data, the RXU-TM will control the
transmitter using the frequency stepping schedule determined
by the parameters.
Setting channel gain To set current sensor channel gain:
1. Determine the peak current expected from the
It is essential to set the gain correctly. An incorrect transmitter and the appropriate gain from
setting can make the data unusable because every Table 7-1.
record will be saturated. Set the gain before data
2. If the RXU-TM is in Record mode, change it to
acquisition, and change it if necessary during
Standby or Setup mode.
acquisition as the transmitter output changes.
Table 7-1 shows the peak signal strength that can be 3. Do one of the following:
recorded on the current sensor channel at each gain • Use the V8 Site Setup window and the radio
setting, as it appears in the V8 Site Setup window and network to set the H Gain of the RXU-TM to the
the RXUPilot View Table function. correct gain.
Table 7-1: Gain factors and signal strength • Use the View Table function in the Utilities
window of the RXUPilot program to change the
Gain Setting Peak Current value of the HGNC parameter.
V8 Site RXUPilot
CMU-1 Mod CMU-1
Setup HGNC
Controlling data acquisition
0.25 –1 50A —
Use the RXUPilot program to control data acquisition
1 0 20A 200A
and monitor station statistics. See Chapter 5 for further
4 1 5A 100A information. Alternatively, control and monitor the
RXU-TM from a V8 over a radio network. See the
16 2 1.25A 25A
chapters on individual geophysical methods for
instructions.
Chapter
Any of the instruments in the System 2000.net family
can be equipped with radio modems for wireless
communication.
This chapter provides instructions on setting up and

operating the radio network. It also provides
background information and suggestions to help ensure
reliable communication among instruments.
Note Illustrations of the V8 windows and dialog boxes in this

V8 receiver. The appearance of the windows and dialog
boxes may vary slightly from what you see on a V8,
and the data values do not necessarily reflect typical
field conditions.
Radio Communication
159 Chapter 8 159

160 Chapter 8 Radio About System 2000.net radio 160
About System 2000.net radio When conditions are suitable, the various instruments
in a survey transmit and receive status information and
System 2000.net instruments equipped with the data in real time. A V8 can also control RXU
optional radio feature communicate over a spread- instruments on the network. For example, a V8 could
spectrum, frequency-hopping radio network operating set up an RXU as a reference or acquisition station or
in the Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) bands. cause it to start and stop acquisition; or, a V8 could
The model number of an instrument equipped with the send the same frequency-stepping schedule to all the
radio feature has the suffix “R”. instruments on the network.
Depending on local regulations and frequency band If radio communication is interrupted, the instruments
allocation, the ISM band may be 902–928MHz or will continue to acquire, process, and store data. When
2.4000–2.4835GHz. The 2.4GHz band is more communication is re-established, the data acquired
common, and is the standard configuration of Phoenix within the last 5 minutes will be transmitted.
instruments.
Lengthy interruptions or complete failure of the
The data protocol is TCP/IP (Transport Control network do not prevent completion of the survey,
Protocol/Internet Protocol) and the radio protocol is because all the instruments store their data on
TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access). TCP/IP ensures CompactFlash cards. The data can later be transferred
the integrity of the data. TDMA manages multiple to a PC for post-processing.
communications by allocating a short, dedicated time
slot to each instrument. Therefore, communication
occurs between only two instruments at a time without Configurations
interference from others on the network. Radio Type (Master or Slave). In any System 2000.net
radio network, one instrument must be designated as
the master, and all the others as slaves. The slave Network address. The Radio Network Address is an
radios can communicate only with the master radio, not arbitrary number between 0 and 65 535 that you set
with each other. The master acts as a TCP/IP router, on each instrument. All instruments that are to
relaying communications among the other instruments. communicate with each other must use the same radio
For this reason, the master should have the tallest network address. If two surveys are being carried out
antenna mast. If there are several remotes sending close to each other, you can prevent them from
data to the V8, it’s best to designate the V8 as the interfering with each other by using a different radio
master and the remotes as slaves. However, any network address for each survey.
station can be designated as the master radio if
On a V8, set the Radio Network Address in the
necessary.
Options and Status dialog box. On an RXU, set the
Note The master-slave relationship is strictly a radio Network Addr in the Communications Status
concern. It should not be confused with the window of the RXUPilot program.
relationship between a V8 and remote RXUs where the
V8 controls the remote instruments. The V8 does not Unit address. A unique Radio Unit Address is
have to be the radio master to be able to control assigned by the master radio to each instrument on the
remotes. Any type of instrument can be a radio master network. The unit address can be any number from 0
or slave. to 199, so theoretically, up to 200 instruments can be
connected on a single network. However, because of
On a V8, set the Radio Type to Master or Slave in the amount of data to be transmitted and the variability
the Options and Status dialog box. On an RXU, select of radio conditions, the practical limit will probably be
either Master or Slave in the Communications less than ten instruments on a network.
Status window of the RXUPilot program.
The radio system determines the unit address
automatically as each slave establishes contact with

the master radio. If the unit address is zero, the Power
instrument is not communicating on the network.
The Radio’s Transmit Power is adjustable. In the
On a V8, view the Radio Unit Address in the Options 900Mz band, it can range from 1mW to 1W. In the
and Status dialog box. On an RXU, view the Unit 2.4GHz band, it can range from 10mW to 1W.
Address in the Communications Status window of
the RXUPilot program. The default setting in both frequency bands is 1W.
Encryption key. The Radio Encryption Key provides In some countries, maximum transmission power in
enhanced security for your data. Like the Radio the ISM band is limited by law.
Network Address, it can be any number between 0
and 65 535, and must be the same for all instruments On a V8, set the Radio’s Transmit Power in the
that are to communicate with each other. Options and Status dialog box. On an RXU, set the
Tx Power in the Communications Status window of
If security of communication is a concern, use large the RXUPilot program.
random numbers for both the Radio Network
Address and the Radio Encryption Key.
Antennas and masts
On a V8, set the Radio Encryption Key in the
Options and Status dialog box. On an RXU, set the A variety of antennas and masts are available to suit
Encryption Key in the Communications Status different conditions.
window of the RXUPilot program.
Types of antennas. Three types of antenna are
available:
• small whip antennas that mount directly on the If the master radio’s position is received by a slave
instruments instrument, or if you enter the master radio’s position
• omni-directional antennas with a higher gain than manually, the slave instrument will calculate the
the whip antennas, and that are normally mounted compass bearing (and distance) to the master radio.
on a mast or tripod
• directional antennas, also with a higher gain than Note When radio communication is established, latitude and
longitude values entered manually will be overwritten
the whip antennas, and mounted on a mast or by actual values received from the master radio, and
tripod bearing will be recalculated.
For survey conditions where there is good line of sight

Latitude is in the format DDmm.mmm,P and longitude
and relatively short distances between slaves and the
is in the format DDDmm.mmm,P, where D is degrees,
master, the whip antennas are suitable on the slaves,
m is minutes, and P is the compass point (N, E, S, or
with either a whip antenna or (preferably) an omni-
W).
directional antenna on the master.
The bearing is given in degrees relative to true north
Where topography or vegetation block the line of sight,
unless a value for Declination has been entered in the
or where longer distances separate the instruments,
Site Setup dialog box of a V8 or the DECL parameter
omni-directional or directional antennas are necessary
of an RXU (from the Parameters window of the
on all instruments.
RXUPilot program). If declination has been set, then
Aiming directional antennas. Directional antennas bearing is relative to magnetic north.
must be aimed accurately or poor communication will
result. Instruments can calculate the compass bearing On a V8, set the Radio master latitude and Radio
to the master radio to help you aim the antennas. master longitude in the Options and Status dialog
box. On an RXU, set the Radio master latitude from the

Parameters window of the RXUPilot program by antenna, since it must be able to communicate with all
assigning a value to the MSTRLAT parameter. Set the the slave radios.
Radio master longitude by assigning a value to the
MSTRLNG parameter.
Communication content and
On a V8, read the Radio master bearing and Radio
master distance in the Options and Status dialog
schedule
box. On an RXU, read the Mstr Rng/Brng from the When the instruments on a network are powered on,
Communications Status window of the RXUPilot the slaves attempt to contact the master at random
program. short intervals. For quickest network configuration,
Types of masts. For good radio communication, the power the master radio first, then power each of the
most critical factor is the height of the antennas above slave instruments at different times so they are not
the ground. A tripod mount and two types of masts are competing to contact the master.
available:
When the master connects with a slave, it assigns a
• land-surveyor’s tripod modified to accept an unique unit address to that instrument and
antenna, approximately 2m high automatically updates it with several parameters, such
• medium-height (8m) military-grade mast with guy as the master’s latitude and longitude. (See “Aiming
wires directional antennas” on page 163 for a discussion of
• tall (15m) military-grade mast with guy wires how to use this information.)
For use with slave radios, the tripod is a good choice,

as it is light and portable. Generally, you should use
either the 8m or 15m mast for the master radio
Note If there are more than 6 radios on the network, it is
• Line number
normal for the Net indicator to alternate between Off • Geophysical factor (IP only)
and On until all the slave radios have been configured
by the master. If you set Remote Control to Yes in the V8 Site
Setup dialog box, the V8 will also control the recording
Once the radio network is established, the master status of the RXUs. Each time you choose a command
sends a ping to each slave once per minute as a test of from the Acquisition menu (Start Recording, Pause
continued communication. (A ping is simply a short Recording, Standby), the V8 will send the same
data packet that requests an acknowledgement.) command to each of the RXUs currently on the
Instruments on the network that are set up to request network.
stack results from each other will also ping each other
When the instruments are acquiring data, they
and track the time from the last successful ping.
calculate geophysical parameters such as resistivity,
If the V8 is successfully communicating with a remote phase, and chargeability from stacked waveforms. The
instrument, the Update cell for that instrument in the slaves send these statistics to the master, which then
Box spreadsheet of the Site Setup window will be forwards them to the other instruments along with its
highlighted in red. own statistics.
When you choose Start Recording from the V8 All instruments on the network can incorporate other
Acquisition menu, the V8 sends the following instruments’ statistics in their own calculations.
information to the station RXUs (i.e., not the However, only the V8 has the processing power and
transmitter monitor or noise reference RXUs) on the memory to handle statistics from the entire network.
network: RXUs are limited to 6 channels—typically three local
• Site name

166 Chapter 8 Radio Factors affecting radio communication 166
channels, two noise-reference channels, and the System gain
transmitter monitor (RXU-TM) channel.
System gain is the combined effect of:
If radio communication is interrupted or of poor quality,
• transmitter power
instruments will try to resend their results. When
• transmitter gain
viewing stack results in the V8 Acquisition window,
you will see a time lag reported for channels that are • receiver gain
not up to date. Instruments will not try to resend data • receiver sensitivity
that is older than 5 minutes. The receiver sensitivity is not adjustable; however,
system gain can be increased by increasing the
transmitter power or changing antennas to increase
Factors affecting radio transmitter and/or receiver gain.
communication Transmitter power. On the V8, the Radio’s Transmit

Power is user selectable from the Options and
Three factors determine the success of radio Status dialog box. On RXUs, Tx Power is user
communication among instruments: selectable from the Communications Status window.
• system gain In the 900 MHz band, four power levels are available:
• path loss 1mW, 10mW, 100mW, and 1W, corresponding to 0, 10,
• interference 20, and 30dBm.
For reliable communications, system gain must be well In the 2.4GHz band, seven power levels are available:
above path loss. Interference is generally an 10mW, 50mW, 100mW, 250mW, 500mW, 750mW, and
uncontrollable variable. 1 W.
Note The default value for transmitter power on all Path loss
instruments is 1W—the maximum available. You can
reduce the output power to conserve battery power in Path loss is the reduction in signal strength due to
areas of good radio reception, or when testing distance or obstacles between antennas.
instruments in a laboratory setting.
A flat terrain with unimpeded line of sight between
Transmitter gain. The transmitting antenna may be a instruments is the best environment for radio
normal-gain or high-gain antenna. The transmitter gain communication. Path loss will increase unpredictably in
is the antenna gain minus cabling loss between the hilly or wooded terrain or where there are other
antenna and the instrument. obstacles between the instrument antennas.
Receiver gain. Similar to transmitter gain. The The only ways to overcome or reduce path loss are to
receiving antenna may be a normal-gain or high-gain increase the height of the antennas above the ground
antenna. The receiver gain is the antenna gain minus or, if directional antennas are in use, to aim the
cabling loss between the antenna and the instrument. antennas more accurately.
Receiver sensitivity. Radio receiver sensitivity in the Table 8-1 presents examples of path loss for different
System 2000.net family is –105dBm. antenna heights and distances. The figures are real
The maximum system gain is the maximum transmitter averages taken from rural environments, using the
power plus the receiver sensitivity (30 + 105 = 2.4GHz band.
135dBm), plus the antenna gains, minus the cable
loss.

Table 8-1: Path loss examples (2.4GHz) • Change to a shorter antenna cable.
Distance Base Height Remote Path Loss Decrease path loss.
(km) (m) Height (m) (dB)
• Change to a directional antenna on one or more
5 15 2.5 121.5 slave instruments and aim the antenna(s) at the
master antenna.
5 30 2.5 115.9
If radio communication has been established, the
8 15 2.5 129.1 master will transmit its latitude and longitude to the
8 15 5 122.7 slaves. If not, you can enter that information
manually. The instrument will then calculate the
8 15 10 110 bearing so you can aim the antenna accurately.
• Increase the height of the antennas above the
ground. In particular, the antenna on the master
Gain margin radio should always be positioned as high as
possible.
The difference between system gain and path loss is
the gain margin, and must be at least 10dB for reliable • Reposition the antennas, attempting to get line-of-
sight between instruments.
communication. The following methods can be used to
increase gain margin:
Increase system gain.
• Increase the radio transmitter power.
• Change to a high-gain antenna on one or more
instruments.
Setting up radio
communication
This section explains the physical setup of radio
antennas and masts, and how to control the radio
network from the instruments.
Assembling antenna tripods Fig. 8-1: Remove 6 screws.
When Phoenix ships an antenna tripod, the mast

2. Pull the mast out of the tripod, reverse it so the
section is attached upside down to reduce overall
mast points upward, and replace the six screws.
length. Before using a tripod for the first time, you
(See Fig. 8-2.)
must reinstall the mast section right side up.
To assemble an antenna tripod:

1. Remove the six Phillips screws holding the mast to
the tripod, as shown in Figure 8-1.
169 Chapter 8 Radio Setting up radio communication 169

• cable connector
• mounting tube
• mounting tube collar
• two large mounting screws
The shorter cable is intended to remain connected to

the antenna, and the antenna is intended to remain
connected to the mounting tube, for the duration of the
survey. The cable connector joins the shorter cable to
the longer cable, which connects to the instrument.
This arrangement makes it easy to detach the antenna
from the instrument when moving from site to site.
Fig. 8-2: Tripod with mast reinstalled.
Warning Antenna cable is heavy and not very flexible. In
cold temperatures, it also becomes brittle. To
Installing an omni-directional ! prevent cable breaks, do not bend antenna cable
sharply or allow it to kink.
antenna on a tripod
Eight pieces of equipment are required to install the To install the antenna on a tripod:
antenna on a tripod: 1. Slide the mounting tube collar onto the mounting
• antenna tube and position it 2–3cm below the screw hole in
• 1m antenna cable the tube (but at least 15cm from the bottom of the
• 5m antenna cable tube). (See Fig. 8-3 on page 171.)
2. Use the hexagonal wrench supplied to tighten the
three set screws around the circumference of the
Antenna
collar.
3. Connect the 1m cable to the antenna.
4. Remove the locking screw from the antenna base.
5. Insert the 1m cable into the end of the mounting
tube nearest the collar.
Antenna locking screw
6. Slide the mounting tube over the cable and fit the
tube to the antenna base, aligning the screw holes.
Mounting tube collar
7. Replace the antenna locking screw and tighten it.
Set screw 8. Feed the 1m cable into the top of the tripod mast
and slide the mounting tube into the mast. (See
≥15cm
Fig. 8-4 on page 172.)
Mounting tube 9. Insert the two large screws into the holes on either
side of the mast and tighten until the mounting
tube is secure.
Fig. 8-3: Antenna in mounting tube with collar in place. 10. Use the cable connector to join the 5m cable to the
1m cable.
11. Remove the protective cap from the instrument
antenna terminal and connect the 5m cable to the
instrument.

Installing an omni-directional
antenna on a mast
The only major difference between tripod and mast
Antenna
installation is that two U-bolts are used instead of a
collar and set screws.
To install the antenna on a mast:

1. Connect the 1m cable to the antenna.
Mounting tube collar 2. Remove the locking screw from the antenna base.
Mounting tube inside mast
3. Insert the 1m cable into the end of the mounting
Securing screws tube nearest the screw hole.
4. Slide the mounting tube over the cable and fit the
tube to the antenna base, aligning the screw holes.
1m cable inside mast
5. Replace the antenna locking screw and tighten it.
cable connector 6. Use the two U-bolts supplied to fasten the mounting
5m cable to instrument tube securely to the top of the antenna mast.
7. Use the cable connector to join a 15m or 20m cable
to the 1m cable.
8. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to raise and
Fig. 8-4: Antenna assembly secured in tripod mast. stabilize the mast.
9. Remove the protective cap from the instrument Operating the RXU radio
antenna terminal and connect the cable to the
instrument. RXU radios can be operated locally with the RXUPilot
program on a handheld terminal, or remotely from the
Warning Antenna cable is heavy and not very flexible. In V8 once radio communication is established. See
cold temperatures, it also becomes brittle. To Chapter 5, “RXUPilot”, for instructions on using the
! prevent cable breaks, do not bend antenna cable handheld terminal, and the chapters on the individual
sharply or allow it to kink.
RXU instruments for instructions on operating RXU
radios locally.
Installing a whip antenna To monitor and control the RXU radio from the
The small whip antennas connect directly to the V8:
instrument without a cable. They are effective only 1. From any acquisition window, type Ctrl, O to open
when path loss is relatively small. the Options and Status dialog box.
2. Select the serial number of the RXU from the
To install a whip antenna: Select box serial number scrolling list.
1. Remove the protective cover from the antenna 3. In the spreadsheet, scroll down until the radio
connector on the side of the instrument. options are visible. (See Fig. 8-5 on page 174.)
2. Screw the antenna onto the connector. 4. Change the radio options as required.
3. Position the antenna so that it points straight up. Changes take effect when you move the focus to another
control.

2. In the spreadsheet, scroll down until the radio
options are visible. (See Fig. 8-5.)
3. If the V8 is the master radio, set the Radio type to
Master. Otherwise, set the Radio type to Slave.
4. Set the Radio encryption key to a value between
0 and 65 535. The encryption key must be the
same for all instruments in the network.
5. Set the Radio network address to a value
between 0 and 65 535. The network address must
be the same for all instruments in the network.
6. Watch the Radio unit address in this dialog box
Fig. 8-5: V8 radio options. and the Net indication in the status bar to monitor
radio communication.
Operating the V8 radio

The setup and monitoring of radio communication on
Network initialization
the V8 is done from the Options and Status dialog After you configure the radios, the network initializes
box. automatically. The master radio adds each slave radio
to the network one at a time. However, each time a
To set up and monitor the V8 radio: slave is added to the network, the master radio must
1. From any acquisition window, type Ctrl, O to open go offline in order to increment a parameter in the
the Options and Status dialog box. modem. It is normal, therefore, to see the network
status alternate between “up” and “down” several
times during the first few minutes of communication,
until all the slaves are online.

Chapter
This chapter explains how to create and manage
frequency stepping tables for controlled-source
methods.
Frequency Stepping
177 Chapter 9 177

178 Chapter 9 Freq. Stepping About System 2000.net frequency stepping 178
About System 2000.net Frequency. System 2000.net instruments derive

frequencies from a 921.6kHz base frequency, and
frequency stepping therefore may not be able to produce exactly the
requested frequency. Use at least 6 (preferably 8)
Phoenix current source controllers and System significant digits when specifying a frequency. The
2000.net receivers are capable of transmitting and instruments will calculate the closest approximation
receiving specific signal frequencies according to a possible. For best results in frequency domain
GPS-synchronized schedule. methods, use frequencies from Table 9-1 on page 179.
Schedules can be created on a PC and the files Phase. For synchronization with other Phoenix GPS-
transferred to the instruments, or a schedule can be equipped instruments, the phase is such that if the
created by the instruments in real-time, calculated waveform were extended backward in time, the centre
from a small set of parameters. If the instruments are of the positive on time (or the negative on time in
on a radio network, either of these schedule types can unipolar negative) would align with 2000/01/01
be set up on a V8 and then transmitted wirelessly to all 00:00:00 UTC.
the other instruments.
Note Leap seconds may occur at the beginning of January
Depending on the capabilities of the the current source, or July every few years, as determined by the
the schedules can specify a variety of bipolar or International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems
unipolar waveforms, in either time domain or frequency Service (IERS). If a leap second happens to occur
domain modes. while the transmitter is generating a waveform, there
may be a discrepancy of 1s in its phase. To prevent
The output current of some Phoenix current sources, problems, consult the IERS Web site (www.iers.org) for
such as the T-200 and the TXU-30, can also be notifications, and avoid transmitting during the
occurrence of a leap second.
controlled by the frequency schedule tables.
Table 9-1: Recommended frequencies for frequency domain operation
Frequency (Hz)
1024.0000 512.0000 256.0000 128.0000 64.00000 32.00000
61.44000 30.72000
7680.000 3840.000 1920.000 960.0000 480.0000 240.0000 120.0000 60.00000 30.00000
948.1481 474.0741 237.0370 118.5185 59.25926 29.62963
56.88889 28.44444
1706.667 853.3333 426.6667 213.3333 106.6667 53.33333 26.66667
51.20000 25.60000
6400.000 3200.000 1600.000 800.0000 400.0000 200.0000 100.0000 50.00000 25.00000
3072.000 1536.000 768.0000 384.0000 192.0000 96.0000 48.00000 24.00000
47.40741 23.70370
2844.444 1422.222 711.1111 355.5556 177.7778 88.8889 44.44444 22.22222
341.3333 170.6667 85.3333 42.66667 21.33333
5120.000 2560.000 1280.000 640.0000 320.0000 160.0000 80.0000 40.00000 20.00000
614.4000 307.2000 153.6000 76.8000 38.40000 19.20000
9600.000 4800.000 2400.000 1200.000 600.0000 300.0000 150.0000 75.0000 37.50000 18.75000
568.8889 284.4444 142.2222 71.1111 35.55556 17.77778
34.13333 17.06667
8533.333 4266.667 2133.333 1066.667 533.3333 266.6667 133.3333 66.6667 33.33333 16.66667
Table 9-1: Recommended frequencies for frequency domain operation (cont’d)
Frequency (Hz) Period (s) Frequency Period (s) Frequency Period (s)
16.00000 8.000000 4.000000 2.000000 1.000000 1.000000 0.500000 2.000000 0.250000 4.000000
15.36000 7.680000 3.840000 1.920000 0.960000 1.041667 0.480000 2.083333
15.00000 7.500000 3.750000 1.875000 0.937500 1.066667 0.468750 2.133333 0.234375 4.266667
14.81481 7.407407 3.703704 1.851852 0.925926 1.080000 0.462963 2.160000
14.22222 7.111111 3.555556 1.777778 0.888889 1.125000 0.444444 2.250000
13.33333 6.666667 3.333333 1.666667 0.833333 1.200000 0.416667 2.400000 0.208333 4.800001
12.80000 6.400000 3.200000 1.600000 0.800000 1.250000 0.400000 2.500000 0.200000 5.000000
12.50000 6.250000 3.125000 1.562500 0.781250 1.280000 0.390625 2.560000
12.00000 6.000000 3.000000 1.500000 0.750000 1.333333 0.375000 2.666667 0.187500 5.333333
11.85185 5.925926 2.962963 1.481481 0.740741 1.350000 0.370370 2.700000 0.185185 5.400000
11.11111 5.555556 2.777778 1.388889 0.694444 1.440000 0.347222 2.880000
10.66667 5.333333 2.666667 1.333333 0.666667 1.500000 0.333333 3.000000 0.166667 5.999999
10.00000 5.000000 2.500000 1.250000 0.625000 1.600000 0.312500 3.200000 0.156250 6.400000
9.60000 4.800000 2.400000 1.200000 0.600000 1.666667 0.300000 3.333333 0.150000 6.666667
9.37500 4.687500 2.343750 1.171875 0.585938 1.706667
8.88889 4.444444 2.222222 1.111111 0.555556 1.800000 0.277778 3.600000 0.138889 7.199999
8.53333 4.266667 2.133333 1.066667 0.533333 1.875000 0.266667 3.750000
8.33333 4.166667 2.083333 1.041667 0.520833 1.920000 0.260417 3.840000
Table 9-1: Recommended frequencies for frequency domain operation (cont’d)
Frequency Period (s) Frequency Period (s) Frequency Period (s) Frequency Period (s) Frequency Period (s)
0.1250000 8.00000 0.0625000 16.00000 0.0312500 32.00000 0.01562500 64.0000 0.00781250 128.000
0.1200000 8.33333 0.0600000 16.66667 0.0300000 33.33333 0.01500000 66.6667 0.00750000 133.333
0.1171875 8.53333
0.1111111 9.00000 0.0555556 18.00000 0.0277778 36.00000 0.01388889 72.0000 0.00694444 144.000
0.1041667 9.60000 0.0520833 19.20000 0.0260417 38.40000 0.01302083 76.8000
0.1000000 10.00000 0.0500000 20.00000 0.0250000 40.00000 0.01250000 80.0000 0.00625000 160.000
0.0937500 10.66667 0.0468750 21.33333 0.0234375 42.66667

0.0925926 10.80000 0.0462963 21.60000 0.0231482 43.20000 0.01157407 86.4000 0.00578704 172.800
0.0833333 12.00000 0.0416667 24.00000 0.0208333 48.00001 0.01041667 96.0000 0.00520833 192.000
0.0781250 12.80000 0.0390625 25.60000
0.0750000 13.33333 0.0375000 26.66667 0.0187500 53.33333 0.00937500 106.6667 0.00468750 213.333
0.0694444 14.40000 0.0347222 28.80000 0.0173611 57.60000 0.00868056 115.2000 0.00434028 230.400
0.0666667 15.00000 0.0333333 30.00000 0.0166667 59.99999 0.00833333 120.0000 0.00416667 240.000
0.00390625 256.000
Automatic modes. Two different automatic frequency- you specify. The advantage of the Auto Stepping mode
stepping modes are available: the file-based mode and is that you can set only a few parameters and have the
the Auto Stepping mode. In the Auto Stepping mode, instrument calculate all the table entries automatically.
the instrument builds a frequency-stepping table that (If you want to specify more entries, it is better to use
can contain up to 100 entries, including up to 20 that the file-based mode.)
The file-based mode allows you to create schedules on When the binary files are saved on an instrument’s
a PC. Each file can contain up to 100 entries specifying CompactFlash card, you can choose which one to
the waveform, the frequency, the current, and the activate, either from a scrolling list in the Acquisition
schedule. Parameters dialog box of a V8, or by setting an RXU
parameter using the RXUPilot program. You can also
The easiest way to create a frequency schedule file is activate a schedule on the V8 and then transmit that
by using the TblEdit program on a PC. This program
schedule to all the other instruments on a radio
creates and reads schedule files in the binary format
network.
required by the instruments. See Chapter 4, “Table
Files and TblEdit” on page 87 for more information on The system calculates each schedule in the automatic
TblEdit, before continuing with this chapter. modes to begin at 00:00:00 UTC each day and repeat
continuously. For this reason, it is best to plan your
Alternatively, you can create schedule files in any
schedules so that an integral number of repetitions can
spreadsheet or text-processing program that can save occur in a 24-hour period. If the total duration of your
in Comma Separated Values (.csv) format. After saving
schedule does not divide evenly into 24h and you
the files, you can use a small utility program called
happen to be working at 00:00:00 UTC, you will
FreqTabl or Generate Frequency Stepping Table to experience an abrupt return to the first frequency in
convert the files to binary (.tfs) format. This method of
the schedule.
creating schedule files is described in the following
pages. Table 9-2 on page 183 illustrates the waveform that
will be generated for each Time and Frequency domain
code setting in the schedule files.
Table 9-2: Transmission codes and resulting waveforms
Ratio Duty
Domain Waveform Code
ON:OFF Cycle
Time 1:1 50% TD50

bipolar
1:1:1:1
Time 1:2 33.33% TD33
bipolar
1 : 2 :1 : 2
Time 1:3 25% TD25
bipolar
1:3 :1: 3
= Aligned with 2000/01/01 00:00:00 UTC.
Table 9-2: Transmission codes and resulting waveforms (cont’d)
Ratio Duty
ON:OFF Cycle
Frequency — 100% FD
bipolar
1:1
Frequency 10:8 55.55% FD9
( f + 9f ) bipolar
1:1
1 : 1
Time 1:1 50% TD50P
unipolar
positive 1:1:1:1
Time 1:2 33.33% TP33P
unipolar
positive 1 : 2 :1 : 2
= Aligned with 2000/01/01 00:00:00 UTC.

Table 9-2: Transmission codes and resulting waveforms (cont’d)
Ratio Duty
ON:OFF Cycle
Time 1:3 25% TD25P

unipolar
positive 1:3 :1: 3
Time 1:1 50% TD50N
unipolar
negative 1:1:1:1
Time 1:2 33.33% TD33N
unipolar
negative 1 : 2 :1 : 2
Time 1:3 25% TD25N
unipolar
negative 1:3 :1: 3
= Aligned with 2000/01/01 00:00:00 UTC.
186 Chapter 9 Freq. Stepping Creating a frequency schedule file 186
Creating a frequency schedule text editor such as Notepad if you remember to insert
the commas yourself.
file
To create a frequency schedule file:
A frequency schedule file can contain from 5 to 100
1. Launch Excel (or your preferred software).
lines. Each line must contain:
2. In Table 9-2, “Transmission codes and resulting
• The waveform type
waveforms,” on page 183, find the waveform you
• The frequency
want to transmit, and note the corresponding Code
• The requested current, if controlling a T-200 or in the last column.
TXU-30 current source (zero for other current
sources) 3. In the first cell of the spreadsheet, type the
waveform Code (see Fig. 9-1).
• The end-time of transmission for that frequency,
relative to the start of the schedule 4. Move to the next cell on the right and type the
frequency in Hz. Refer to the User Guide or Specifi-
The “requested current” is the maximum desired cations for your current source; do not request a
current at a given frequency. Whether the current frequency outside its limits.
source can actually producethat much current depends
5. Move to the next cell on the right and
on electrode placement, local resistivity, etc.
• for a T-200 or TXU-30 current source, type the
All items on the line must be separated by a comma. requested current at that frequency, in amperes.
This is most easily achieved in a spreadsheet program • for other current sources, type a zero.
such as Microsoft® Excel or OpenOffice, using the Save
as CSV function. However, you can also use a simple
6. Move to the next cell on the right and type the end 7. Copy the waveform Code and paste it into the first
time for that frequency (relative to the start of the column cells for all the remaining rows you intend
schedule) in the format 00:00:00. to use. (The waveform cannot change part way
through a schedule.)
Tip When typing end-times (in any program), always use

the complete format 00:00:00, even if the duration is
only for minutes or seconds. Otherwise, if the file is re-
opened in Excel, the durations may be corrupted by
Excel’s automatic formatting.
8. Complete the remaining cells, typing a frequency,

requested current, and end time in each row.
9. For the last frequency in your table, it is best to
type an end time that divides evenly into 24h (see
“Automatic modes” on page 181).
10. Save the file, using a numeral greater than or equal
to 2 as the file name and specifying CSV as the file
type. (From the File menu in Excel, choose Save
As. In the Save as type box, select CSV
Fig. 9-1: Creating a schedule file in Excel. For current sources (Comma-delimited) (*.csv)).
other than the T-200 or TXU-30, Column C should have values of
zero.

Converting the schedule to binary
format
The file you create in Excel or Notepad must be
converted to binary format before the System 2000.net
instruments can read it. The output of the Generate
Fig. 9-2: Choosing CSV as the file type in Excel.
Frequency Stepping Table program is a binary format
(If you are using Notepad, save the file, specifying file with the same name as the the CSV file, but with
All Files as the file type and adding .csv as the the extension TFS.
extension.)
To convert the schedule to binary format:
11. Make a note to yourself of the details of the
schedule contained in the file. When you activate a 1. Open the folder where you installed the Generate
schedule later, you will need to know which file to Frequency Stepping Table.exe program, or the
choose for the schedule you want. folder containing the shortcuts created by the
installation, and the folder where you stored the
Note If you want to create a large number of schedule files, CSV file.
you can save the files with more meaningful names. 2. Drag the CSV file onto Generate Frequency
However, you will have to rename such files to
Stepping Table.
numerical names before an RXU or V8 can use them.
The Generate Frequency Stepping Table window appears,
displaying the contents of the schedule. The window closes
automatically after about 10s.
3. Copy the binary schedule files to a CompactFlash The Generate Frequency Stepping Table window appears
and displays the contents of the schedule. The window closes
card and install it in the instrument.
automatically after about 10s.
Activating a schedule file

When schedule files exist on the CompactFlash card
installed in a V8, they will appear in the Freq.
stepping control scrolling list of the Acquisition
Parameters dialog box. When schedule files exist on
the CompactFlash card installed in an RXU, they can be
selected by setting parameters using the RXUPilot
program on a handheld device.
Fig. 9-3: Generate Frequency Stepping Table window. To activate a schedule file on a V8:
1. From the Setup menu, choose Acquisition
Examining a binary schedule file Parameters.
2. In the Freq. stepping control list, scroll to the
If you want to review the contents of a schedule that schedule file you want to use.
has been converted to binary format, simply drag the
TFS file onto Generate Frequency Stepping Table in the The Frequency Stepping Table spreadsheet updates to show
the file contents.
same way as you did the CSV file.
189 Chapter 9 Freq. Stepping Activating a schedule file 189

190 Chapter 9 Freq. Stepping Setting up the Auto Stepping frequency table 190
To activate a schedule file on an RXU: The instrument creates the frequency stepping table
1. Beam the parameters from the RXU to the handheld using three types of parameters:
device. • FREQn (V8) or FRQn or FRnn (RXU), specified
2. Change the value of the AUTO parameter to the file values for the first frequencies in the table.
name of the schedule you want to use. (0≤n≤19 on an RXU; 1≤n≤20 on a V8.)
• Lowest frequency (V8) or FEND (RXU), an
For example, if you want to use the schedule file approximate value for the last frequency in the
3.tfs, set AUTO to 3. table.
• Frequencies per octave (V8) or FPOC (RXU), an
integer that determines the frequencies per octave
Setting up the Auto Stepping to complete the table automatically. (An octave is
the span between two frequencies, one of which is
frequency table twice the other.)
In the Auto Stepping mode, the instrument builds a Although you can specify all 20 values for the FREQn
frequency-stepping table in real time in a pattern or FRQn/FRnn parameters, you will typically specify
determined by parameters that you specify. The table only a few of them, establishing a starting frequency
can contain up to 100 entries, including up to 20 non- and/or a pattern of frequency stepping, and allowing
pattern frequencies that you specify. The advantage of the Lowest frequency and Frequencies per octave
the Auto Stepping mode is that you can set only a few to determine the remaining table entries based on that
parameters and have the instrument calculate all the starting frequency or pattern.
table entries automatically. (If you want to specify
more entries, it is better to use the file-based mode.)
Note When specifying the first frequencies in the table,
3. Edit one or more cells from FREQ2–FREQ20,
always start with the lowest numbered parameter assigning them the desired frequencies. End with
(FREQ1 or FRQ0) and work consecutively. the sequence of frequencies you want to use as the
Unspecified parameters should be set to a value of 0. frequency-stepping pattern, with all remaining
FREQn cells set to a value of 0.
Specifying non-pattern and pattern To specify frequencies on an RXU:

frequencies 1. Beam the parameters from the RXU to the handheld
device.
You can specify one or more frequencies at the
2. Edit the FRQ0 parameter, assigning it a value less
beginning of the table—for example, a 1Hz test
than or equal to the highest frequency your current
signal—that will not affect the automatic calculation of
source can transmit.
the remaining frequencies. As detailed below, the
automatic calculation is based on the frequencies in the 3. Edit one or more parameters from FRQ1–FR19,
last octave that you specify. assigning them the desired frequencies. End with
the sequence of frequencies you want to use as the
To specify frequencies on a V8: frequency-stepping pattern, with all remaining
FRQ1–FR19 parameters set to a value of 0.
1. In the Acquisition Parameters window, press
Ctrl, F to move the focus to the Frequency List 4. Beam the new parameters to the RXU.
spreadsheet.
2. Edit the FREQ1 frequency cell, assigning it a value
less than or equal to the highest frequency your
current source can transmit.
Selecting a frequency-stepping 3. Edit the Frequencies per octave parameter,
assigning it the number of frequencies per octave
pattern you want.
There are two patterns that the instruments can follow 4. Press Ctrl, U to update the Frequency Stepping
to complete the frequency table: Table.
• Equally spaced divisions of descending octaves, When the V8 completes the table, it will start with the last non-
starting with the last non-zero value of the specified zero value of FREQn and repeatedly multiply by
frequencies. 2
– 1 ⁄ ( Frequencies per octave )
until the table is full or the Lowest
• A sequence of frequencies (equally or unequally frequency has been reached.
spaced) per descending octave, based on the last
sequence of specified frequencies that are in To select equally spaced divisions of the octave
descending order and span less than an octave. on an RXU:
1. Beam the parameters from the RXU to the handheld
To select equally spaced divisions of the octave device.
on a V8:
2. Edit the FEND parameter, assigning it the approx-
1. In the Acquisition Parameters window, choose imate value of the lowest frequency you want. (As
Auto Step as the Freq. stepping control. explained under “Frequency” on page 178, not all
2. Edit the Lowest frequency parameter, assigning it frequencies can be generated by the RXU.)
the approximate value of the lowest frequency you 3. Edit the FPOC parameter, assigning it the number
want. (As explained under “Frequency” on of frequencies per octave you want.
page 178, not all frequencies can be generated by
the V8.) When the RXU completes the table, it will start with the last non-
zero value of FRQn and repeatedly multiply by
– 1 ⁄ ( Frequencies per octave )
2 until the table is full or the FEND Note The Frequency Stepping Table is not the same as
frequency has been reached. the list of FREQ1–FREQ20 parameters. These
parameters will not change value when the V8 creates
To select a repeating sequence of frequencies per the Frequency Stepping Table.
octave on the V8:
1. In the Acquisition Parameters window, choose To select a repeating sequence of frequencies per
Auto Step as the Freq. stepping control. octave on an RXU:
2. Start with the lowest-numbered unassigned 1. Beam the parameters from the RXU to the handheld
parameter among FREQ1–FREQ20. Edit that device.
parameter, assigning it the highest frequency of the 2. Start with the lowest-numbered unassigned
pattern. parameter among FRQ0–FR19. Edit that
3. Edit the next parameters in sequence, assigning parameter, assigning it the highest frequency of the
them consecutively lower frequencies in the pattern.
pattern. The difference between the first and last 3. Edit the next parameters in sequence, assigning
frequencies of the sequence must be less than an them consecutively lower frequencies in the
octave. Ensure the remaining FREQn parameters pattern. The difference between the first and last
are set to a value of 0. frequencies of the sequence must be less than an
4. Press Ctrl, U to update the Frequency Stepping octave. Ensure the remaining FRQn/FRnn param-
Table. eters are set to a value of 0.
When the V8 completes the table, it will repeatedly divide each When the RXU completes the table, it will repeatedly divide each
frequency in the sequence by 2 until the table is full or the frequency in the sequence by 2 until the table is full or the FEND
Lowest frequency has been reached. frequency has been reached.
Note The schedule table is not the same as the list of

frequency and Cycles per frequency. If Total
FRQ0–FR19 parameters. These parameters will not time is not 0, then the table is truncated or the
change value when the RXU creates the schedule. duration of the last frequency is extended
accordingly. It is best to use Total time to ensure
that your schedule can be repeated an integral
Setting up the schedule number of times in 24h (see “Automatic modes” on
page 181).
Three parameters control the time schedule:
• CPFR, Cycles per frequency, the minimum To set up the schedule on a V8:
number of cycles generated for each frequency. • Edit the Time per frequency, Cycles per
(The Time per frequency parameter may cause a frequency, and Total time parameters, assigning
longer duration for a given frequency.) Use Cycles them the appropriate values for your application.
per frequency to ensure that sufficent cycles of
very low frequencies are recorded. To set up the schedule on an RXU:
• TPFR, Time per frequency, the duration in 1. Beam the parameters from the RXU to the handheld
seconds for which each frequency is generated, device.
unless the Cycles per frequency parameter
2. Edit the TPFR, CPFR, and TTOT parameters,
causes a longer duration for a given frequency. Use
assigning them the appropriate values for your
Time per frequency to set the duration for
application.
recording of the relatively high frequencies.
• TTOT, Total time, controls the duration in seconds
of the entire table. If Total time = 0, then the
length of the schedule is controlled by Time per
Setting up automatic current
reduction (roll-off) for T-200 and LF current
TXU-30 transmitters
Requested current
If the transmitter load is inductive, then the achievable
current will drop as frequency increases. If the output
current falls too far below the requested current, a fault
will be triggered. To avoid this condition, set up Auto
corner
Rolloff
Stepping to reduce the requested current as frequency
increases. The effect of automatic current reduction is
shown in Fig. 9-4 on page 195.
Increasing frequency
Fig. 9-4: Automatic current reduction.
Note Automatic roll-off of current is applicable only to T-200

and TXU-30 transmitters.
Two parameters control the automatic reduction of

requested current:
196 Chapter 9 Freq. Stepping Activating Auto Stepping 196
• CRMX, Transmitted LF current (Transmitted Low
Frequency current), in amperes.
Activating Auto Stepping
• FCMX, Rolloff corner frequency, the frequency Note If any of the frequencies in the Frequency Stepping
at which the requested output current will be Table are invalid (they cannot be generated
reduced to about 70% of Transmitted LF current. accurately from the base clock frequency of
921.6kHz), they must be changed to valid
The transmitted current for each frequency f in the frequencies. On the V8, invalid frequencies are
table is equal to: highlighted in red in the Frequency Stepping Table.
LF transmitted current
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
( 1 + ( ( f ) ⁄ ( Rolloff corner frequency ) ) 2 ) To activate Auto Stepping on a V8:
1. As described earlier, complete the entries for:
To set up automatic current reduction on a V8:
• the Frequency List spreadsheet
• Edit the Transmitted LF current and Rolloff
• Frequencies per octave
corner frequency parameters, assigning them the
appropriate values for your application. • Lowest frequency
• Cycles per frequency
To set up automatic current reduction on an RXU: • Time per frequency
1. Beam the parameters from the RXU to the handheld • Total time
device. • Transmitted LF current
2. Edit the CRMX and FCMX parameters, assigning • Rolloff corner frequency
them the appropriate values for your application.
2. Press Ctrl, U to update the Frequency Stepping
Table spreadsheet.
3. Review the Frequency Stepping Table spreadsheet To activate Auto Stepping on an RXU:
to ensure that the values reflect your intentions, 1. Beam the parameters from the RXU to the handheld
and that no values are highlighted in red, indicating device.
invalid frequncies.
2. Edit the following parameters, assigning them the
4. Change the Freq. stepping control to Auto Step. appropriate values for your application.
• FRQ0—FR19
• FPOC
• FEND
• CPFR
• TPFR
• TTOT
• CRMX
• FCMX
3. Set the AUTO parameter to 1.

Chapter
This chapter explains how to use the V8 in Spectral
Induced Polarization (also called Complex Resistivity)
surveys.

• setting up site parameters.
• setting up acquisition parameters.
• acquiring data.
Spectral Induced Polarization (SIP)
199 Chapter 10 199

200 Chapter 10 SIP Using the SIP function 200
Using the SIP function •

•
inverted Wenner
random placement
The V8 is well suited to any of the popular approaches
The following figures illustrate the array types, using
used to measure Spectral Induced Polarization (SIP,
the conventional designations of A and B for the
also called Complex Resistivity or CR). Because the V8
transmitter electrodes and M and N for the receiver
can acquire multiple channels simultaneously and also
electrodes. Lower case a is the distance between M and
communicate over a network with a transmitter and
N, and n is an integer multiplier. Most figures show only
remotes such as the RXU-2, surveys can be carried out
one M-N pair, but in all methods except the
quickly over a large area.
Schlumberger, Wenner, and inverted Wenner arrays,
multiple M-N channels can be used.
Array layouts
The V8 is capable of acquiring SIP data from these
electrode array types:
• dipole-dipole
• pole-dipole
• pole-pole
• gradient
• Schlumberger
• inverted Schlumberger
• Wenner
I
V I
V V V
M N A B
A M M N M N N B
a na a
a a a
Fig. 10-1: Dipole-dipole array. Fig. 10-4: Gradient array.
B I
V I
V
M N A
A M N B
a na >10a
na a na
Fig. 10-2: Pole-dipole array. Fig. 10-5: Schlumberger (n > 2) and Wenner (n = 1) arrays.
V
M B
V I
I
N A
M A B N
>10a na >10a
na a na
Fig. 10-3: Pole-pole array Fig. 10-6: Inverted Schlumberger (n > 2) and inverted Wenner
(n = 1) arrays.
201 Chapter 10 SIP Using the SIP function 201

202 Chapter 10 SIP Setting up SIP survey and site parameters 202
Setting up SIP survey and site Entering survey and instrument

parameters information
Complete the Survey Information area of the SIP
Note Illustrations of the V8 windows and dialog boxes in this Site Setup window as described under “Entering
survey information” on page 53.
Complete the Box spreadsheet of the SIP Site Setup
field conditions. window as described under “Entering Box information
and changing mode” on page 55.
A number of survey parameters are common to all
geophysical methods, and so are described in Chapter
3, Common Operations. Please read that chapter
before continuing.
To launch the SIP function:

• From the main window, choose SIP (press Ctrl,
then type S).
The SIP Site Setup window appears (see Fig. 10-7).
positions of additional channels, and increment the
positions automatically as the survey progresses.
Note Use positive numbers to denote positions that are east

or north of the map origin. Use negative numbers to
denote positions that are south or west of the map
origin.
To select the Array type:

1. Press Ctrl and type A to move the focus to the
Array Layout area.
2. Scroll through the Array type list by pressing Enter
or the space bar repeatedly until the array type you
want to use appears.
Fig. 10-7: The SIP Site Setup window.
Dipole-dipole, pole-dipole, and pole-pole arrays. In
these types of arrays, it is necessary to define the
Entering array layout information positions of the transmitter and the first channel
electrode, as well as the length of the dipoles (or the
The information required in the Array Layout area channel spacing, in the case of pole-pole arrays).
varies depending on the type of array you use—
Schlumberger, dipole-dipole, gradient, etc. However,
once the information about the array type and the
starting point(s) is entered, the V8 can calculate the
To set up for dipole-dipole, pole-dipole, or pole- the first receiver electrode, measuring in the North
pole arrays: reference direction only (distance TxN in Fig. 10-8).
1. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move from Array 10. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text
type to North reference. box (East) and type the distance in metres from
2. Scroll through the North reference list by pressing the survey map origin to the same transmitter
Enter or the space bar until the reference you want electrode, measuring in the East reference direction
to use appears. only (distance TxE in Fig. 10-8).
3. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to Declination.
N
4. Type the magnetic declination for the survey
location, in degrees from true north. Receiver electrodes
RxE
5. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to Tx dipole
length (AB).
RxN
6. Type the transmitter dipole length in metres. Map origin
7. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to Rx dipole
TxN
length (MN) (or Channel spacing, in the case of
TxE
pole-pole arrays) and type the dipole length or Transmitter electrodes
channel electrode spacing in metres.
Survey line
8. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text
Fig. 10-8: Defining initial transmitter and receiver positions
box, Tx station close to Rx (North).
(dipole-dipole shown). TxN and TxE define the transmitter (Tx)
9. Type the distance in metres from the survey map electrode closest to the receiver. RxN and RxE define the receiver
origin to the transmitter electrode that is closest to (Rx) electrode closest to the transmitter.
11. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text If you will be “pulling” along the survey line (moving
box, Rx station close to Tx (North), and type the the array in the direction from B toward A), then
define the position of B and the nearest N.
distance in metres from the survey map origin to
the receiver electrode that is closest to the trans-
mitter electrode just defined, measuring in the To set up for gradient, Wenner, Schlumberger
North reference direction only (distance RxN in and Inverse arrays:
Fig. 10-8). 1. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move from Array
12. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text type to North reference.
box (East) and type the distance in metres from 2. Scroll through the North reference list by pressing
the survey map origin to the same receiver Enter or the space bar until the reference you want
electrode, measuring in the East reference direction to use appears.
only (distance RxE in Fig. 10-8). 3. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to Declination.
Gradient, Wenner, Schlumberger and Inverse arrays. In 4. Type the magnetic declination for the survey
these types of arrays, it is necessary to define the location, in degrees from true north.
positions of the transmitter and the first channel 5. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text
electrode, as well as (in some cases) the length of both box.
the transmitter dipole (A–B) and the receiver dipole 6. If Tx dipole length (AB) is enabled, type the
(M–N). Where a dipole length is not applicable to the transmitter dipole length in metres.
method, the text box is disabled.
7. If Rx dipole length (MN) is enabled, type the
Note If you will be “pushing” along the survey line (moving dipole length in metres.
the array in the direction from A toward B), then
define the position of A and the nearest M.
8. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text 10. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text
box, Tx start position (North). box (East) and type the distance in metres from
9. Type the distance in metres from the survey map the survey map origin to the same transmitter
origin to a transmitter electrode (A if pushing, B if electrode, measuring in the East reference direction
pulling), measuring in the North reference direction only (distance TxE in Fig. 10-9).
only (distance TxN in Fig. 10-9). 11. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text
box, Rx start position (North), and type the
N distance in metres from the survey map origin to
TxE Transmitter
electrode B the receiver electrode that is closest to the trans-
RxE mitter electrode just defined, measuring in the
Direction
North reference direction only (distance RxN in
Receiver
electrodes RxN
of survey Fig. 10-9).
Map origin movement
TxN (pulling) 12. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next text
box (East) and type the distance in metres from
the survey map origin to the same receiver
Transmitter
electrode A
electrode, measuring in the East reference direction
only (distance RxE in Fig. 10-9).
Survey line
Fig. 10-9: Defining initial transmitter and receiver positions Random placement arrays. The V8 cannot calculate
(gradient array shown, with the survey “pulling” from B toward values for random arrays. See “Entering channel
A).
information” on page 207 for instructions on how to set
up for random arrays.
Entering channel information • an identifier, such as “Ex1”
• view status
After the instrument capabilities have been defined in • location co-ordinates
the Box spreadsheet, you need to assign names and
location co-ordinates to each channel, and decide The identifier, ID, is simply a text string that helps you
whether you want to see the channel’s data displayed remember the channel location and purpose when you
as it is acquired. You can also enter measurements of view the data acquisition window. Although you can
electrical characteristics such as electrode resistance. enter up to 100 characters, it’s best to use a short, 3-
The contains all this information (see Fig. 10-10). or 4-character identifier.
The choice of View status determines whether or not

the channel will be shown in the plots or lists of data in
the Acquisition window.
The location co-ordinates, + (North), + (East),

Fig. 10-10: The Channel spreadsheet. – (North), and – (East), can be entered manually if
necessary, but the V8 will calculate them automatically
Some of the cells in the Channel spreadsheet are for the standard array types. (see “Calculating co-
automatically populated with information you entered ordinates” on page 208). You only need to override the
in the Box spreadsheet, so you don’t need to retype calculated values if an electrode position varies from
serial numbers or channel numbers. the standard Array Layout. If your array type is
Three types of information need to be entered for each Random, you will have to enter all the location co-
channel: ordinates manually.
The electrical characteristics consist of electrode Calculating co-ordinates
contact resistance and AC and DC voltages.
There are two command buttons that cause the V8 to
To enter channel information: calculate co-ordinates. One calculates the starting
1. Press Ctrl to move the focus to the Channel position according to the Array Layout information. The
spreadsheet. other calculates the incremental position when you
move to the next site along the survey line.
2. Press the ARROW keys to move the focus to the ID
column in the row you want to configure. Note Automatic updating is only possible for gradient,
3. Enter an identifier name. dipole-dipole, pole-dipole, and pole-pole arrays. In
other array types, the distance between array
4. In the View column, press Enter or the space bar positions along the survey line is not related to the
to choose whether the channel data should be array layout itself, so automatic updating is not
displayed during acquisition. possible.
5. If the location co-ordinates cannot be calculated
automatically, enter the distances from the survey To calculate intial co-ordinates:
map origin, measured in the positive and negative • Move the focus to the Calculate Coord. button,
polarity north and east directions. and press Enter.
6. If desired, enter the measured contact resistance in
The V8 populates the Channel spreadsheet with values
the Res(ohm) column, and AC and DC voltages in
calculated from the Array layout parameters.
millivolts in the AC(mV) and DC(mV) columns.
7. Repeat this procedure for each channel of each
instrument.
To update co-ordinates automatically: Completing SIP Site setup
• Move the focus to the Next Site button and press
Enter to increment co-ordinates. When you are satisfied with the site setup parameters,
exit the setup window and set up the acquisition
parameters.
Modifying calculated co-ordinates
To end SIP Site Setup:
Whenever local conditions require a modification to the
• Either move the focus to the Done button and
pattern of electrode placement, you can simply
press Enter, or press Esc, or press Ctrl and type D.
override the automatic calculation made by the V8 and
enter the actual values measured in the field. The SIP Site Setup window closes and you are returned to the
SIP Acquisition window.
To modify calculated co-ordinates:

1. Press the Ctrl key to move the focus to the
Channel spreadsheet. Setting up SIP acquisition
2. Press the ARROW keys to move among the spread-
sheet cells in columns + (North), + (East),
parameters
– (North), and – (East), and replace the calcu- The acquisition parameters control the frequency-
lated value(s) with the actual value(s) as required. stepping schedule and various filters intended to
reduce the effects of cultural noise.
The frequency stepping can be automatic or manual. If

it is automatic, the schedule can be created from
209 Chapter 10 SIP Setting up SIP acquisition parameters 209

parameters you specify, or a schedule can be loaded
from a saved file.
The V8 must be in Standby mode in order to change

acquisition parameters.
To put the V8 into Standby mode:

1. From the Acquisition menu, choose Standby.
(The current mode is disabled.)
Fig. 10-11: The Acquisition menu, showing the V8 in Standby Fig. 10-12: SIP Acquisition Parameters dialog box.
mode.
To set up acquisition parameters: Setting up filtering and coupling

Parameters, or simply press Ctrl, A. The low pass filter (LP Filter), Line Frequency filter,
and Coupling functions are explained in Chapter 3 on
The SIP Acquisition Parameters dialog box opens page 60. Choose values for these settings that are
(Fig. 10-12).
suitable for the survey conditions.
Setting up frequency stepping To activate Auto Stepping:
1. As described under “Setting up the Auto Stepping
See Chapter 9, “Frequency Stepping” on page 177 for frequency table” on page 190, complete the entries
complete information on automatic file-based or for:
parameter-based frequency stepping.
• The Frequency List spreadsheet
Schedule files must be prepared on a PC and • Frequencies per octave
transferred to the CompactFlash card before they can
• Lowest frequency
be used.
Parameter-based frequency stepping can be • Time per frequency
programmed on the V8 as described in Chapter 9.
• Total time
To activate a schedule file: • Transmitted LF current
1. From the Setup menu, choose Acquisition • Rolloff corner frequency

Parameters. 2. Press Ctrl, U to update the Frequency Stepping
2. In the Freq. stepping control list, scroll to the Table spreadsheet, and review it to ensure that the
schedule file you want to use. values reflect your intentions.
3. Move the focus to the Freq. stepping control
The Frequency Stepping Table spreadsheet updates to show
the file contents.
scrolling list and scroll to Auto Step.

212 Chapter 10 SIP Acquiring SIP data 212
Acquiring SIP data

Once you have set up the parameters for your survey,
you can begin acquiring data.
To acquire SIP data:

1. Follow the instructions in the User Guide for your
current source to begin transmitting current.
2. From the V8 SIP Data Acquisition window,
choose the Acquisition menu and select Start
Recording.
The V8 begins recording data, and displays a spreadsheet of the
channels that you set to View = Yes. Below the spreadsheet,
the V8 displays a plot of the data acquired for the first channel in
the spreadsheet. Fig. 10-13: The SIP Acquisition window while recording.
Viewing channel results

The area below the menus shows acquired data results.
See “Customizing data and plot appearance” on
page 70 for instructions on showing or hiding the
spreadsheet list and the graphical plot, as well as the
bar and curve plots.
Evaluating the data and correcting
gain
As the instruments work through the frequency
stepping table, the spreadsheet values and plots of
apparent resistivity and phase will be updated. From Fig. 10-14: Bar chart showing noise (green) and signal (blue).
this information you can decide when data quality and
quantity are sufficient for the current site. Curves will To evaluate the bar charts:
be smooth, error bars small, and the listing of standard 1. Check the length of the peak-to-peak bar. It should
deviations will show small values. span at least 20% but no more than about 90% of
the dynamic range.
However, as soon as the instrument(s) start recording
data, you should examine the plots of signal strength If the peak-to-peak bar extends near the 100%
versus noise. These horizontal bars can guide you in limits, gain is set too high and records will be
choosing better values for channel gain. If the radio saturated. If the bar extends less than about 20%
network is operating, examine the remote channels as of the range, gain is too low and it will take a long
well as the local ones. time to record quality data.
2. Check the position of the peak-to-peak bar. It
In the plot area, a thin green bar indicates peak-to-
should be no more than about 10% off centre.
peak input, or noise. A thicker blue bar indicates signal
strength. (The colours can be changed. See If the peak-to-peak bar is badly off centre, dynamic
“Customizing the V8 by setting options” on page 67.) range will be much reduced. The most likely causes
are a strong self-potential between electrodes or a
faulty electrode.

To correct the gain: 4. From the Acquisition menu, choose Resume
1. From the Acquisition menu, choose Pause Recording, or press Ctrl, R.
Recording or press Ctrl, U. 5. Re-evaluate the peak-to-peak bar.
2. From the Setup menu, choose Site Setup, and
change the Gain setting(s) in the Box spreadsheet.
Changing location along the survey
3. Close the Site Setup window, and from the Acqui-
sition menu, choose Resume Recording, or press line
Ctrl, R.
When you are satisfied with the quality and quantity of
4. Evaluate the peak-to-peak bar and repeat the gain data at a survey station, you can put the V8 into
adjustment if necessary. Standby mode and move the array to the next position
in the survey. There is no need to shut the V8 down,
To correct an off-centre peak-to-peak bar: and by leaving it on, you retain GPS satellite
1. From the Acquisition menu, choose Pause synchronization, which saves time at the next site.
Recording or press Ctrl, U.
2. Check the electrode placement for conditions that To put the V8 into Standby mode and move the
might cause a voltage offset (self-potential), and array:
consider moving the electrode. (If you do move it, 1. From the Acquisition menu, choose Standby.
update the co-ordinates manually in the Site Setup 2. Move your array to the next location on the survey
window of the V8.) line.
3. Try replacing the electrode with an electrode known 3. Return to the SIP Site Setup window and update
to be good. location co-ordinates with the Next Site button, if
it is enabled. If it is disabled because your Array
Type doesn’t afford automatic calculation, you The data file names will be updated automatically.
must update the positions manually. (See 4. Close the SIP Site Setup window, and start
“Modifying calculated co-ordinates” on page 209.) recording data again.

Chapter
This chapter explains how to use the V8 in Controlled
Source Audiofrequency Magnetotelluric (CSAMT)
surveys.

• Setting up site parameters
• Setting up acquisition parameters
• Acquiring data
Controlled Source AMT (CSAMT)
217 Chapter 11 217

218 Chapter 11 CSAMT Using the CSAMT function 218
Using the CSAMT function Transmitter and RXU-TM
The V8 is well suited to either scalar or vector CSAMT

methods. Because the V8 can acquire multiple channels
simultaneously and also communicate over a network
with a transmitter and remotes such as the RXU-3, Hy
V8
surveys can be carried out quickly over a large area. RXU
Array layouts
Fig. 11-1: Scalar CSAMT array.
The V8 is capable of acquiring CSAMT data from these
array types:
Transmitter and RXU-TM
• scalar (Ex, Hy or Ex, Hx, Hy)
• vector (Ex, Ey, Hx, Hy)
The number of channels depends on the hardware

configuration purchased. Hy
Hx V8 RXU
The following figures illustrate typical array setups with
V8 and RXU-3 instruments.
Fig. 11-2: Vector CSAMT array.

Setting up CSAMT survey and
site parameters
field conditions.

3, Common Operations. Please read that chapter
before continuing.
Fig. 11-3: The CSAMT Site Setup window.
To launch the CSAMT function:
• From the main window, choose CSAMT (press Ctrl,
then type C). Entering survey and instrument
The CSAMT Site Setup window appears (see Fig. 11-3).
information
Complete the Survey Information area of the CSAMT
Site Setup window as described under “Entering
219 Chapter 11 CSAMT Setting up CSAMT survey and site parameters 219
Complete the Box spreadsheet of the CSAMT Site To enter the Array Layout information:
Setup window as described under “Entering Box 1. Press Ctrl and type A to move the focus to the
information and changing mode” on page 55. Array Layout area.
2. Scroll through the Array type list by pressing Enter
Entering array layout information or the space bar.
3. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move the focus to the
The information required in the Array Layout area North reference list and press Enter or the space
describes the type of array, dipole length, azimuths, bar until the reference you want to use appears.
and starting position. Once this information is entered, 4. Move the focus to Declination and type the
the V8 can calculate the positions of additional
magnetic declination for the survey location, in
channels, and increment the positions automatically as
degrees from true north.
the survey progresses.
5. Move the focus to Hy azimuth and type the orien-
Note Use positive numbers to denote positions that are east tation of the Hy sensor, in degrees from the North
or north of the map origin. Use negative numbers to reference.
denote positions that are south or west of the map
origin.
6. Move the focus to Ex length and type the length of
receiver dipole, in metres.
Use Ex and Hx to denote orientation parallel to the
7. Move the focus to Ex azimuth and type the orien-
survey profile. Use Ey and Hy to denote orientation
tation of the Ex dipole, in degrees from the North
perpendicular to the profile.
reference.
8. Move the focus to Start pot coord. and in the
(North) and (East) fields, type the distances in
metres from the survey map origin to the receiver in the Box spreadsheet, so you don’t need to retype
electrode at the beginning of the survey line. serial numbers or channel numbers.
Three types of information need to be entered for each

Entering channel information channel:
• An identifier, such as “Ex1”
After the instrument capabilities have been defined in
• View status
the Box spreadsheet, you need to assign names and
• Location co-ordinates
location co-ordinates to each channel, and decide
whether you want to see the channel’s data displayed The identifier, ID, is simply a text string that helps you
as it is acquired. You can also enter measurements of remember the channel location and purpose when you
electrical characteristics such as electrode resistance. view the data acquisition window. Although you can
The Channel spreadsheet contains all this information enter up to 16 characters, it’s best to use a short, 3- or
(see Fig. 11-4). 4-character identifier.
Note Standard terminology uses Ex and Hx to denote

orientation parallel to the survey profile, and Ey and Hy
to denote orientation perpendicular to the profile.
Fig. 11-4: The Channel spreadsheet. The choice of View status determines whether or not
the channel will be shown in the plots or lists of data in
Some of the cells in the Channel spreadsheet are the Acquisition window.
automatically populated with information you entered
The location co-ordinates, + (North), + (East), map origin, measured in the positive and negative
– (North), and – (East), can be entered manually if polarity north and east directions.
necessary, but the V8 will calculate them automatically 6. If desired, enter the contact resistance measured in
for the standard array types. (See “Calculating co- ohms in the Res(ohm) column, and AC and DC
ordinates” on page 222.) You only need to override the voltages in measured in millivolts in the AC(mV)
calculated values if an electrode position varies from and DC(mV) columns.
the standard Array Layout.
7. Repeat this procedure for each channel of each
The electrical characteristics consist of electrode instrument.
contact resistance and AC and DC voltages.
To enter channel information: Calculating co-ordinates

1. Press Ctrl to move the focus to the Channel There are two command buttons that cause the V8 to
spreadsheet. calculate co-ordinates. One calculates the starting
2. Press the ARROW keys to move the focus to the ID position according to the Array Layout information.
column in the row you want to configure. The other calculates the incremental position when you
3. Type an identifier. move to the next site along the survey line.
4. In the View column, press Enter or the space bar

To calculate intial co-ordinates:
to choose whether the channel data should be
displayed during acquisition. • Move the focus to the Calculate Coord. button,
and press Enter.
automatically, enter the distances from the survey The V8 populates the Channel spreadsheet with values
calculated from the Array Layout parameters.
To update co-ordinates: Completing CSAMT site setup
Enter to increment co-ordinates. When you are satisfied with the site setup parameters,
exit the setup window.
Modifying calculated co-ordinates To end CSAMT Site Setup:

press Enter, or press Esc, or press Ctrl and type D.
pattern of electrode placement, you can simply
override the automatic calculation made by the V8 and The CSAMT Site Setup window closes and you are returned to
the CSAMT Acquisition window.
enter the actual values measured in the field.

1. Press the Ctrl key to move the focus to the Setting up CSAMT acquisition
Channel spreadsheet.
parameters
sheet cells in columns + (North), + (East), The acquisition parameters control the frequency-
– (North), and – (East), and replace the calcu- stepping schedule and various filters intended to
lated value(s) with the actual value(s) as required. reduce the effects of cultural noise.
The frequency stepping can be automatic or manual. If

223 Chapter 11 CSAMT Setting up CSAMT acquisition parameters 223

parameters you specify, or a schedule can be loaded
from a saved file.
The V8 must be in Standby mode in order to change


(The current mode is disabled, so if the Standby
command is unavailable, the V8 is already in
Standby mode.)
Fig. 11-6: CSAMT Acquisition Parameters dialog box.
Fig. 11-5: The Acquisition menu, showing the V8 in Standby

mode. Setting up filtering and coupling
To set up acquisition parameters: The low pass filter (LP Filter), Line Frequency filter,
page 60. Choose values for these settings that are
Parameters, or simply press Ctrl, A.
suitable for the survey conditions.
The CSAMT Acquisition Parameters dialog box opens
(Fig. 11-6).
1. Press Ctrl, S and press the DOWN ARROW key to move
See Chapter 9, “Frequency Stepping” on page 177 for the focus to the Freq. stepping control scrolling
complete information on automatic file-based or list, and scroll to Auto Step.
2. As described in Chapter 9, complete the entries for:
Schedule files must be prepared on a PC and • The Frequency List spreadsheet
transferred to the CompactFlash card before they can
• Frequencies per octave
be used.
• Lowest frequency
Parameter-based frequency stepping can be • Cycles per frequency
programmed on the V8 as described in Chapter 9.
• Time per frequency
To activate a schedule file: • Total time
1. From the Setup menu, choose Acquisition • Transmitted LF current

Parameters. • Rolloff corner frequency
2. In the Freq. stepping control list, scroll to the 3. Press Ctrl, U to update the Frequency Stepping
schedule file you want to use. Table spreadsheet, and review it to ensure that the
values reflect your intentions.
the file contents.

226 Chapter 11 CSAMT Acquiring CSAMT data 226
Acquiring CSAMT data

To acquire CSAMT data:

2. From the V8 CSAMT Data Acquisition window,
choose the Acquisition menu and select Start
Recording.
channels you set to View = Yes. Below the spreadsheet, the V8
displays a plot of the data acquired for the first channel in the
spreadsheet. Fig. 11-7: The CSAMT Acquisition window while recording.
Viewing channel results

spreadsheet list and the graphical plot, as well as the
Evaluating the data and adjusting
gain
the dynamic range.
network is operating, check the remote channels as of the range, gain is too low and it will take a long
are a strong self-potential between electrodes or a
faulty electrode.

To correct the gain: 4. From the Acquisition menu, choose Resume
1. From the Acquisition menu, choose Pause Recording, or press Ctrl, R.
Recording or press Ctrl, U. 5. Re-evaluate the peak-to-peak bar.
2. From the Setup menu, choose Site Setup, and
change the Gain setting(s) in the Box spreadsheet.
Ctrl, R.
4. Evaluate the peak-to-peak bar and repeat the gain data at a survey station, you can put the V8 into
adjustment if necessary. Standby mode and move the array to the next position
To correct an off-centre peak-to-peak bar: and by leaving it on, you retain GPS satellite
update the co-ordinates manually in the Site Setup 2. Move your array to the next location on the survey
window of the V8.) line.
3. Try replacing the electrode with an electrode known 3. Return to the CSAMT Site Setup window and
to be good. update location co-ordinates with the Next Site
button, if it is enabled. If it is disabled because your
Array Layout doesn’t afford automatic calculation, The data file names will also be updated automati-
you must update the positions manually. (See cally.
“Entering channel information” on page 221.) 4. Close the CSAMT Site Setup window, and start
recording data again.

Chapter
This chapter explains how to use the V8 in Time
Domain Electromagnetics (also called Transient
Electromagnetics or TEM) surveys.

• Setting up site parameters
• Setting up acquisition parameters
• Acquiring data
Time Domain Electromagnetics

(TDEM, TEM)
231 Chapter 12 231
232 Chapter 12 TDEM Using the TDEM function 232
Using the TDEM function Since the V8 and RXU-TM are relatively close together
in this method, small whip antennas are usually
The V8 is well suited to time domain methods. Because sufficient for good radio communication. However,
the V8 can acquire multiple channels simultaneously difficult terrain or heavy vegetation may require that
and also communicate over a network with a tripod or mast antennas be used instead.
transmitter monitor, surveys can be carried out more
Transmitter
efficiently and with a smaller crew. and RXU-TM
The V8 can be configured for either MulTEM or LoTEM Transmitting loop

geophysical methods.
Site layout Sensor

The following figure illustrates a typical site setup for
the MulTEM method with V8 and RXU-TM instruments. V8
The transmitting loop size is dependent on the required
depth of investigation and can vary from a few metres
to several hundred metres square. The sensor shown is
a single multi-turn circular coil sensor for surface
installation, but could also be of a type suitable for
down-hole data acquisition. If the transmitting loop is
large, multiple coil sensors could be used to acquire
several channels simultaneously. Fig. 12-1: Typical TDEM (MulTEM) layout.
Polarity considerations aligned so that the positive directions for x, y, and z are
north, east, and down, respectively. In order to create
Three factors can affect the polarity of the received a positive down magnetic field in the middle of the
signal: transmitting loop, the positive current direction should
• current source phase be clockwise around the loop when viewed from above.
• transmitting loop orientation Therefore, connect the transmitting loop wire so that it
• sensor orientation runs from the current source positive terminal,
clockwise around the site perimeter, and back to the
Although polarity reversal can be corrected during current source negative terminal.
acquisition, the need for correction (and the possibility
of introducing error) can be eliminated by setting up Sensor orientation. The sensor polarity is dependent on
the transmitting loop and sensor properly to begin the direction of the windings, which is determined by
with. (For instructions on activating automatic polarity which side of the sensor faces upward. It is important
reversal, see “Setting up automatic polarity correction” that the sensor always be placed with the correct side
on page 244.) facing upward. For loops equipped with stands and
levelling devices, this is obvious. If your sensor has no
Current source phase. The RXU-TM controls the current obvious markings, consult the documentation from the
source frequency and phase relative to the arbitrary manufacturer.
reference time of 2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC
(disregarding leap seconds). The middle of the positive
on-time (or negative on-time in unipolar negative Latest detectable signal
modes) is aligned with this reference.
The latest detectable signal in the TDEM method
Transmitting loop orientation. In the conventional depends on several factors, including transmitting loop
right-handed co-ordinate system, magnetic sensors are

size, current, local resistivity and signal-to-noise ratio.
This section explains the calculation of the practical ( Mt ⁄ Nm ) 2 1⁄5
t = µ -------------------------------
-
limits of signal detection. 400 ( π ρ a )
L 3
TDEM apparent resistivity. The formula for late time

L Equation 12-2.
apparent resistivity, ρ a , in TDEM is:
The measurement noise level Nm is normally around
µ 2µM 2/3 10-8 to 10-10 V/m2. Assuming Nm is 10-9 V/m2 and that
ρ a = ------- ⎛⎝ -----------------t-⎞⎠
L
t –5 ⁄ 3
4π 5V ⁄ Sr the transmitting loop is 100m x 100m (i.e., 104 m2),
we can calculate the latest detectable signal time in
Equation 12-1.
milliseconds for various transmitter moments and
where: apparent resistivities. The results are shown in
Table 12-1 and graphically in Fig. 12-2 following the
µ = magnetic permeability ( 4π10 – 7 H/m in air) table. The table and graph show that high current
values are required to extend the time of the latest
Mt = transmitter moment = IL 2
detectable signal.
L = length of transmitter loop side (metres)
I = current (amperes)
V = receiver EMF (volts)
Sr = receiver coil effective area (square metres)
Replacing V/Sr with the measurement noise level, Nm

allows us to develop Equation 12-2 to calculate the
time of latest detectable signal:
Table 12-1: Time of latest detectable signal (ms) Depth of investigation
L The depth of investigation in TDEM is dependent upon
Tx Moment ρ a (Ω•m)
(A•m2) the time of TDEM response and earth resistivity. As a
1000 100 10 rule of thumb, the depth of investigation can be
0.912 3.64 14.5 estimated as shown in Equation 12-3.
5 x 104
10 x 104 1.2 4.79 19.1

D = 500 ρ t
50 x 104 2.29 9.12 36.2
Equation 12-3: D is depth in metres, ρ is apparent resistivity in ohm
metres, and t is time in milliseconds.
60
Amperes into 100 x 100 m loop
50
40
Setting up TDEM survey and
30
1000 Ω·m
100 Ω·m
site parameters
10 Ω·m
20
10 Guide are taken from a PC emulation program, not a
0
0 10 20 30 40
Time (ms)
field conditions.
Fig. 12-2: Current vs. latest signal time for three different apparent
resistivities.
235 Chapter 12 TDEM Setting up TDEM survey and site parameters 235
3, “Common Operations”. Please read that chapter
before continuing.
To enter the TDEM function:

• From the main window, choose TDEM.
The TDEM Site Setup window appears (see Fig. 12-3 on
page 236).
Entering survey and instrument

information
Complete the Survey Information area of the TDEM Fig. 12-3: The TDEM Site Setup window.
Site Setup window as described under “Entering

Entering array layout information
Complete the Box spreadsheet of the TDEM Site
The information required in the Array Layout area
Setup window as described under “Entering Box
describes the type of array, station spacing, azimuth,
information and changing mode” on page 55.
starting position, and transmitting loop. Once this
information is entered, the V8 can calculate the
positions of additional channels, and increment the
positions automatically as the survey progresses.
Ramp length. The Array Layout area also includes
information on the transmitting loop, including the
Ramp length. Ramp length is the time delay from the Theoretical waveform Actual waveform with ramp
point that the current source turns off to the point that
Fig. 12-4: Ramp length.
output actually falls to zero (see Fig. 12-4). The value
of Ramp length depends on the electrical To enter the Array Layout information:
characteristics of the current source and the
1. Press Ctrl and type A to move the focus to the
transmitting loop, and is generally two to three times
Array Layout area.
the time constant (L/R) of the loop. The value you type
does not have to be accurate—an estimate of 0.05ms 2. Scroll through the Array type list and choose
for a T-4 or 0.12ms for a T-3 current source is either LoTEM or MulTEM according to the method
reasonable. you are using.
3. Press the DOWN ARROW key to move the focus to the
Tx Loop Turns. It is possible to increase the strength of
North reference list and press Enter or the space
the primary magnetic field by running the transmitting
bar until the reference you want to use appears.
loop wire two or more times around the site perimeter
before connecting it to the current source. The Tx 4. Move the focus to Declination and type the
Loop Turns text box allows you to specify the number magnetic declination for the survey location, in
of turns of wire used. degrees from true north.
5. Move the focus to Profile azimuth and type the Entering channel information
orientation of the profile, in degrees from the North
reference. After the instrument capabilities have been defined in
6. Move the focus to Station space and type the the Box spreadsheet and the Array Layout has been
distance to be used between soundings, in metres. defined, you need to assign names and location co-
ordinates to each channel, and decide whether you
7. Move the focus to Ramp length and type the
want to see the channel’s data displayed as it is
estimated value of the current source and trans-
acquired. You can also enter measurements of
mitting loop ramp time in milliseconds.
electrical characteristics such as electrode resistance.
8. If you are using the LoTEM method, skip to The Channel spreadsheet contains all this information
“Entering channel information” on page 238. (see Fig. 12-5).
9. Move the focus to Tx Loop Length and type the
length in metres of the longer side of the trans-
mitting loop.
The value you type is automatically copied to Tx Loop Width.
10. If your transmitting loop is not square, move the Fig. 12-5: The Channel spreadsheet.
focus to Tx Loop Width and type the length in
metres of the shorter side of the loop. Some of the cells in the Channel spreadsheet are
11. Move the focus to Tx Loop Turns and type the automatically populated with information you entered
number of turns of wire in the transmitting loop. in the Box spreadsheet, so you don’t need to retype
serial numbers or channel numbers.
Three types of information need to be entered for each The location co-ordinate Vert. (Z) is intended for use
channel: with down-hole sensors to record the depth at which
• An identifier, such as “B1” the sensor is positioned. For coil sensors at the surface,
• View status leave the value as zero.
• Location co-ordinates The Len/Area column serves two purposes. If the
channel is recording from a dipole, such as the
The identifier, ID, is simply a text string that helps you
transmitter dipole in LoTEM, type the length of the
remember the channel location and purpose when you
view the data acquisition window. Although you can dipole in metres. If the channel is recording from a loop
sensor, type the effective area of the loop in square
enter up to 16 characters, it’s best to use a short, 2- to
metres (physical area of the sensor × number of turns
4-character identifier.
of wire within the sensor). The area of the transmitting
The choice of View status determines whether or not loop is automatically calculated when you enter the Tx
the channel will be shown in the plots or lists of data in Loop Length and Tx Loop Width in the Array
the Acquisition window. Layout area.
The location co-ordinates, North (N) and East (E), The electrical characteristics for E channels consist of
can be entered manually if necessary, but the V8 will electrode contact resistance in ohms, Res (ohm) and
calculate them automatically for the standard array AC and DC voltages in millivolts, DC (mv) and AC
types. (See “Updating co-ordinates” on page 240.) You (mv).
only need to override the calculated values if a sensor
position varies from the standard Array Layout. To enter channel information:
1. Press Ctrl to move the focus to the Channel
spreadsheet.
2. Press the ARROW keys to move the focus to the ID Updating co-ordinates
column in the row you want to configure.
3. Type an identifier. The V8 can automatically calculate the incremental
position when you move to the next site along the
4. In the View column, press Enter or the space bar
survey line, based on the Profile azimuth and
to choose whether the channel data should be
Station space that you typed in the Array Layout
displayed during acquisition.
area.
automatically, move the focus to the North (N) To update co-ordinates:
and East (E) columns and enter the distances in
metres from the survey map origin.
Enter to increment the co-ordinates.
6. If you are using a down-hole sensor, move the
focus to the Vert. (Z) column and type the sensor
depth in metres. Modifying calculated co-ordinates
7. If you are setting up E channels, enter the contact
resistance measured in ohms in the Res (ohm)
pattern of site placement, you can simply override the
column, and AC and DC voltages in measured in
automatic calculation made by the V8 and enter the
millivolts in the AC (mV) and DC (mV) columns.
actual values measured in the field.
8. Repeat this procedure for each channel.
1. Press the Ctrl key to move the focus to the
Channel spreadsheet.
sheet cells in columns North (N), East (E), and
Setting up TDEM acquisition
Vert. (Z) and replace the calculated value(s) with parameters
the actual value(s) as required.
The acquisition parameters control the frequency-
stepping schedule, sampling window characteristics,
Completing TDEM site setup and filtering intended to reduce the effects of cultural
noise.
When you are satisfied with the site setup parameters,
exit the setup window. The frequency stepping can be automatic or manual. If
To end TDEM Site Setup: parameters you specify, or a schedule can be loaded
from a saved file.
press Enter, or press Esc, or press Ctrl and type D. The V8 must be in Standby mode in order to change
The TDEM Site Setup window closes and you are returned to
the TDEM Acquisition window.
(The current mode is disabled, so if the Standby
command is unavailable, the V8 is already in
Standby mode.)
241 Chapter 12 TDEM Setting up TDEM acquisition parameters 241

Fig. 12-6: The Acquisition menu, showing the V8 in Standby

mode.
To set up acquisition parameters:

Parameters, or simply press Ctrl, A.
The TDEM Acquisition Parameters dialog box opens
(Fig. 12-7).
Fig. 12-7: TDEM Acquisition Parameters dialog box.
Setting up filtering
The Power Line Frequency filter is explained under
“Setting the line frequency filter” on page 66. Choose
the setting that matches the local power grid
frequency.
1. Press Ctrl, S and press the DOWN ARROW key to move
See Chapter 9, “Frequency Stepping” on page 177 for the focus to the Freq. stepping control scrolling
complete information on automatic file-based or list and scroll to Auto Step.
2. As described under “Setting up the Auto Stepping
Schedule files must be prepared on a PC and frequency table” on page 190, complete the entries
transferred to the CompactFlash card before they can for:
be used. • The Frequency List spreadsheet
Parameter-based frequency stepping can be • Frequencies per octave
programmed on the V8 as described in Chapter 9. • Lowest frequency
To activate a schedule file:
• Time per frequency
• Total time
Parameters.
• Transmitted LF current
2. In the Freq. stepping control list, scroll to the
schedule file you want to use. • Rolloff corner frequency
3. Press Ctrl, U to update the Frequency Stepping
the file contents.
Table spreadsheet, and review it to ensure that the
values reflect your intentions. Remember that cells
highlighted in red indicate invalid frequencies.

Setting up sampling windows However, during the first few sampling windows, it is
possible for a correct polarity signal to undershoot
The number of sampling windows is adjustable from 5 zero, or for a reversed polarity signal to overshoot
to 21. The first window occurs during the transmission zero. This overshoot or undershoot, also called
ON time, leaving from 4 to 20 windows for user data “ringing”, is caused by the electrical characteristics of
collection in the transmission OFF time. The duration the transmitting loop.
and separation of the sampling windows is logarithmic
and is determined automatically by the V8. If the V8 happens to sample the signal during ringing,
it is possible for it to read a negative value
To set up sampling windows: (undershoot) even when the signal polarity is positive.
This negative value would then cause the V8 to wrongly
• Move the focus to Number of Wnd (>=5, <=21)
and type the number of sampling windows you “correct” for reversed polarity.
want, including the ON-time window. For this reason, it is a good policy to wait until several
sampling windows have passed before reading and
correcting polarity.
Setting up automatic polarity
correction To enable automatic polarity correction:
As explained under “Polarity considerations” on • Move the focus to Auto polarity fix by Window
page 233, it is possible for polarity to be reversed, and enter the number of the sampling window that
depending on the orientation of the sensor and the should be used to detect signal polarity.
connections of the transmitting loop. The V8 can detect
the polarity of the received signal and automatically
correct reversed polarity.
Acquiring TDEM data spreadsheet list and the graphical plot, as well as the
To acquire TDEM data:

2. From the V8 TDEM Acquisition window, choose
the Acquisition menu and select Start
Recording.
channels you set to View = Yes. Below the spreadsheet, the V8
displays a plot of the data acquired for the first channel in the
spreadsheet (see Fig. 12-8).
Viewing channel results Fig. 12-8: The TDEM Acquisition window while recording.

245 Chapter 12 TDEM Acquiring TDEM data 245

Evaluating the data and adjusting
gain
the dynamic range.
network is operating, check the remote channels as of the range, gain is too low and it will take a long
with E channels are a strong self-potential between
electrodes or a faulty electrode.
To correct the gain: 3. Try replacing the electrode with an electrode known
1. From the Acquisition menu, choose Pause to be good.
Recording or press Ctrl, U. 4. From the Acquisition menu, choose Resume
2. From the Setup menu, choose Site Setup, and Recording, or press Ctrl, R.
change the Gain setting(s) in the Box spreadsheet. 5. Re-evaluate the peak-to-peak bar.
(See “Setting up instrument type, serial number,
channels, and gains” on page 56.)
Ctrl, R.
4. Evaluate the peak-to-peak bar and repeat the gain
data at a survey station, you can put the V8 into
adjustment if necessary.
Standby mode and move the array to the next position
To correct an off-centre peak-to-peak bar:
and by leaving it on, you retain GPS satellite
update the co-ordinates manually in the Site Setup
2. Move your array to the next location on the survey
window of the V8.)
line.

3. Return to the TDEM Site Setup window and The data file names will also be updated automati-
update location co-ordinates with the Next Site cally.
button, if it is enabled. If it is disabled because your 4. Close the TDEM Site Setup window, and start
Array Layout doesn’t afford automatic calculation, recording data again.
you must update the positions manually. (See
“Modifying calculated co-ordinates” on page 240.)
Chapter
This chapter explains how to carry out magnetotelluric
and audio-frequency magnetotelluric surveys using
System 2000.net instruments.
Magnetotellurics (MT) and Audio-

frequency MT (AMT)
249 Chapter 13 249
250 Chapter 13 MT/AMT AMT and MT techniques 250
AMT and MT techniques low-noise area or perhaps an hour in an area affected

by cultural noise. To acquire many cycles of MT
AMT and MT techniques are essentially the same, frequencies, however, takes several hours (or several
differing only in the frequency range captured. The days, for the lowest frequencies).
lower the frequency, the greater the depth of
The V8 and RXU can acquire either AMT or MT data
investigation possible at a given site. MT techniques
from electric channels. The V8 can also acquire data
acquire data in frequencies ranging from about 400Hz
from magnetic channels, if equipped with the
to 0.0000129Hz (a period of about 21.5h), and are
corresponding sensors (MTC-50 coils for MT, MTC-30
suitable for deeper investigations. AMT techniques
coils for AMT). This capability permits an efficient
acquire data in the frequency range of about 1000Hz to
sounding across the entire spectrum. You can acquire
10 000Hz (roughly the range of human hearing, hence
AMT data for a short period as soon as you set up each
the audio designation). AMT is suited to shallower
site, and then change the sensors and reconfigure the
depths of investigation.
instruments to acquire MT data overnight.
The data format of System 2000.net is identical to that

Duration of soundings of Phoenix MTU and MTU-A instruments. Any
combination can be used in a survey.
The length of time it takes to acquire quality data
depends on the frequencies to be studied. During data Note Illustrations of the V8 windows and dialog boxes in this
processing, a number of waveforms at each analyzed Guide are taken from a PC emulation program, not a
frequency are stacked. The more waveforms available, V8 receiver. The appearance of the windows and dialog
the better the data quality. Many cycles of high boxes may vary slightly from what you see on a V8,
frequencies can be acquired in a very short time, so an and the data values do not necessarily reflect typical
field conditions.
AMT sounding can take as little as five minutes in a
Local, Remote, and Far Remote reference for the other. However, in most surveys, a
single, electrically quiet site is chosen, and an
stations instrument with five channels is installed and left in
Although an instrument can be used alone, best results place as the reference for the duration of the survey.
are achieved when a remote or far remote site is Part of the daily routine of retrieving and redeploying
available for noise-reduction techniques. survey sites is to visit the reference site to replace the
battery, verify the installation integrity, and collect the
Apart from the 50Hz or 60Hz grid frequency, electrical previous night’s data.
noise from human activities tends to vary considerably
over distance. The natural magnetic signal, though, It is also possible to set up a more permanent
tends to be the same over large distances—the lower reference site, solar- or grid-powered and equipped
the frequency, the less variation. The Phoenix system with automatic dial-up communication facilities. Such
takes advantage of these characteristics by collecting an installation is typical in monitoring applications or
data simultaneously at the survey (“local”) sites and at when a long-term far remote site is required.
one or more reference (“remote” or “far remote”) sites. Because it is chosen for its low noise characteristics,
For MT data, a far remote site could be as much as
the reference site also makes a good location for the
1000km from the survey area; for AMT data, 50km is a
calibration of all equipment before the survey begins.
reasonable distance. Because all instruments are
synchronized to UTC, data from two or even three sites
can be processed in combination to greatly reduce the Telluric vs. magnetic deployments
effects of local noise.
As mentioned earlier, magnetic signals do not vary
In some cases, it is practical to simply use two local greatly with distance compared to cultural noise. It is
survey sites together, with each acting as the remote therefore practical to acquire magnetic data at
251 Chapter 13 MT/AMT AMT and MT techniques 251

252 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Steps in a typical survey 252
relatively few sites and telluric data at relatively many This section explains the steps in chronological order:
sites. This strategy keeps capital costs low because • Planning
fewer 5-channel instruments have to be purchased. It • Calibrating the equipment
also reduces operating costs, because telluric-only sites • Setting up the survey sites
take less time to install and retrieve.
• Processing the data
• Exporting and interpreting the data
Steps in a typical survey Planning

Every survey is unique, but the general sequence of
When a survey area and objectives have been defined,
steps remains the same. The survey is planned so that
the first step is to plan how the survey will be carried
work crews can set up one or more sites each day,
out. Consider the following when making your plans:
allow the equipment to acquire data for a period of
time, then retrieve the equipment to redeploy it at Choose the sites. Consider if the survey should be
another site. In AMT surveys, or in higher-frequency carried out along one or more lines, or on a grid. Also
MT surveys (periods shorter than 300s), the crew may decide if you will orient your sites to True North,
stay with the equipment while the sounding is taken, Magnetic North, or an arbitrary azimuth on a grid plan.
because acquisition times are shorter. In full-spectrum In all cases, you will need to know the magnetic
MT surveys, the equipment is often left to acquire data declination of your survey area. (See Appendix B on
overnight. page 297 for Internet resources.)
Mark all the proposed sites with unique numbers on a

topographical map.
Identify one or more remote sites that will be in quiet An experienced crew can install a 2-channel site in
areas, yet close enough to be maintained daily, and about 15 minutes; a 5-channel site in difficult
add them to the map. conditions might take an hour. Retrieving equipment
from a site usually takes about 15 to 30 minutes. Travel
In the field, evaluate the proposed sites for noise
time must also be taken into account. Plan a
sources, security of the equipment, and physical access progression from site to site for the most efficient use
or permission limitations. Livestock, wild animals,
of resources.
hikers, industrial or transport activity, power lines or
electric fences, and local laws can all interfere with Obtain permissions. In most cases, the land you want
survey work, equipment, or data. Even vegetation, to survey is owned by a third party. Be sure that you
under windy conditions, can induce micro-vibrations allow sufficient time to contact the landowners to
that will add noise to the data. obtain permission to conduct your work. It is often
helpful to write an explanatory note that you can give
Modify the plan as necessary and mark the final version to the landowner. You might include:
on the map.
• The purpose and benefits of your survey.
Allocate and schedule the equipment. Decide how your • Personal and institutional credentials.
equipment will be allocated, that is, the type of • The anticipated schedule.
instrument and sensors to be used at each site. • An explanation that the equipment is a passive
receiver and does not emit any radiation or noise.
Estimate the number of sites you’ll be able to sound
each day. This number will depend on the type of data • An outline of the physical impact on the land—
to be collected (MT, AMT, or both) as well as on the vehicle access, shallow holes and/or trenches for
factors affecting installation. the electrodes and sensors.

• A commitment to leave the area as undisturbed as both System 2000.net and V5 System 2000
possible. instruments, it is preferable to create the STARTUP.TBL
file by using the WinTabEd Offline Table Editor to
Create a standard set of parameters. Although you can
ensure compatibility. Refer to the V5 System 2000
configure the instruments individually at each
MTU/MTU-A User Guide for instructions on using the
installation, it is much more efficient to put all the
Offline Table Editor.
common information into a binary file and use it
repeatedly.
A single file, called STARTUP.TBL, can be created and Calibrating the equipment
saved for transfer to all the instruments of the same
The first task in the field is to calibrate the instruments
type used in the survey. The file contains instructions
and sensors. Calibration should take place at the
to the instrument such as when to start and stop
beginning of every survey, and may have to be
acquiring data, what frequency ranges to sample at
repeated during a survey if equipment problems arise
what intervals, and so on. It also contains text that
(damaged cables, for instance).
becomes part of the record, such as the names of your
company and Layout Chief. Usually, the reference site is the best location for
calibration, because you’ve chosen it for its low noise
As long as the file is in the DATA folder on the
characteristics and you have permission to use it for a
instrument’s CompactFlash card, the instrument will
longer period of time. Alternatively, you can calibrate
use it automatically.
each set of equipment when you install it for the first
You can create the STARTUP.TBL file by programming time in the survey. In this case, you can perform the
the instrument and saving the settings, or by using the calibration either before (preferably) or after acquiring
TblEdit program on a PC. However, if you want to use data.
Calibration of an instrument takes about 10 minutes. More or fewer people can form the crew, but
Calibration of magnetic sensors requires a calibrated productivity may not be as high.
V8 instrument and takes at least an hour. The
Keep records throughout. It is important to keep
requirements of the physical layout are not as rigorous
careful written records of each survey site. Information
as for data acquisition—you don’t have to carefully
from these records must be included when processing
orient or level the coils, for example. See “Calibrating
the data. The record also helps track down any
the equipment” on page 71 for detailed instructions.
technician errors or equipment problems that may
arise.
Setting up the survey sites Use a standard Layout Sheet and Equipment Checklist,
like those shown in Appendices D and E. The sample
Once the equipment is calibrated, the actual survey
Layout Sheet highlights in red the records that are
work can begin. This section describes the general
essential—serial numbers, measurements, a sketch of
principles of setting up a successful survey site.
the layout, etc. Optional records are printed in black.
Form a 3-person crew. Experience in the field has
Conduct an inventory and inspection. Before you set
shown that the ideal crew consists of a Layout Chief
out each day, make sure you have all the tools and
and two assistants. The Layout Chief stays at the
equipment you need (see the sample Equipment
centre of the site, using a compass to orient the
Checklist in Appendix E.) and check that it’s all in good
assistants as they place the electrodes and/or sensors.
condition. If the survey is just beginning, make sure
While the assistants install the electrodes and sensors,
there is a properly prepared CompactFlash card in
the Layout Chief can set up the instrument itself, take
every instrument. (During the survey, you will
electrical measurements, and write the site record on a
exchange cards daily as you retrieve the equipment.)
Layout Sheet.

Verify the location. When you arrive at a site, ensure Set up the telluric lines. All instruments accept two
you are at the right site number and location as defined dipoles to acquire telluric data. Each dipole consists of
on the plan map. Use a handheld GPS locator or other two lead-chloride porous pot electrodes buried about
reliable method to be sure of your location. 25cm deep in salty mud, connected to the instrument
by cables (commonly called E-lines). The dipoles form
Determine the centre and place the instrument. The
a right angle cross, with the instrument near the
instrument is usually (but not necessarily) placed
centre.
exactly at the site centre, where the dipoles cross.
(Variations from the usual layout are discussed later in
0°
this chapter.) Because there is extra length in the true or
electrodes
cables connecting the electrodes, the instrument itself magnetic
can be placed a metre or two off centre if necessary. North
E-lines
Choose a dry spot that will not pool water if there is V8 or RXU
rain. Stay away from noise sources such as power lines 270°
Ey dipole
90°
and roads, and avoid overhead obstructions that might
Ex dipole
block GPS signals. Try to find a spot that allows easy
access in all four directions to where you’ll place the
electrodes and/or sensors.
180°
Tip In livestock farming areas, electric fences are a
common source of noise. Sites must be located well Fig. 13-1: Standard site layout.
away from these fences, although if the ground is very
conductive, a distance of only 100m can be enough. Typically, each E-line is from 25 to 100m long, making
two equal-length dipoles 50 to 200m long. The longer
the dipole, the better the signal-to-noise ratio but the layout. E-lines may have to be longer or shorter than
greater the AC voltage induced by the local power grid. normal, or a dipole may have to be oriented other than
A high AC voltage can result in unusable data to true or magnetic north.
(“saturated records”) when the dynamic range of the
Obstructed dipoles. If an obstruction in the area
system is exceeded.
means that one E-line has to be shortened, the other
The north-south dipole is referred to as Ex and the can be lengthened to compensate. For example, if a
east-west dipole is referred to as Ey. 100m dipole is planned but the north E-line can only be
30m long, you can extend the south E-line to 70m.
Tip Because maps place North at the top, it is tempting to
think of a north-south line as similar to a graph’s In some cases, the two dipoles may have to be of
vertical y-axis, and an east-west line as similar to its unequal lengths. Although not ideal, this layout is still
horizontal x-axis. With MT techniques, though, the viable.
opposite is true: the north-south dipole is Ex, not Ey.
It’s also tempting to think of the E-line cables as

forming the dipole. However, the dipoles are imaginary
straight lines measured between the electrodes; they
are not the same thing as the physical cables. Always
measure and orient the layout from where the
imaginary dipole lines cross, not where the cables
connect to the instrument.
Adjust for E-line difficulties. Local conditions—

boulders, trees, hills, water bodies, etc.—can often
make it difficult or impossible to keep to a standard

0° example of the importance of keeping accurate records

true or on the Layout Sheet.)
90° magnetic
270°
Ey dipole North
true or
30 33
“N ° magnetic
“ W 3° ”
” North
Ex dipole
pond E
y dip
ole
rocky outcrop
ole
dip
180°
12
x
“E 3°
E
Fig. 13-2: E-line lengths adjusted to avoid an obstruction. 21 ”
“ S 3°
”
Occasionally you won’t be able to orient the dipoles
along the north-south and east-west azimuths you Fig. 13-3: Site rotated to avoid an obstruction.
have planned. In this situation, you can “rotate the

site”—orient the dipoles as much as ±44° away from Note A site rotation, when corrected for magnetic
the planned azimuth, while keeping their right-angle declination, must not exceed ±44°. If you find that
relationship. As long as the azimuth is entered this angle is exceeded, either rotate to a smaller angle
or rotate in the opposite direction.
accurately during data processing, the rotation of the
site will not degrade data quality. (This is another
Excess cable. In order to allow E-lines to be extended
as described earlier, the cables are usually cut in
lengths significantly greater than half the dipole length.
measured
Always lay excess cable in elongated S-shapes, no distance
closer than 5m from the ends. If you coil the excess electrode
instead, you will create an induction loop that will electrode
distort the signal.
actual dipole length
m
≥5
Fig. 13-5: Effect of slope on dipole length.

3
If you encounter inclines ≥20°, you must compensate
m
≥5
using trigonometry. One way is to calculate how much

to lengthen the E-lines when laying out the site so that
Fig. 13-4: Lay excess cable in S-shapes, not coils.
the horizontal component of the vector is the desired
dipole length. Alternatively, you can make no
Slope. E-lines laid out down a steep slope can also
compensation in the field, and instead calculate the
create a problem: the measured distance between the
actual horizontal dipole length before processing the
electrodes no longer equals the actual horizontal length
data.
of the dipole. Instead, the measured distance is a
vector resulting from both horizontal and vertical Wind. Try to avoid setting up close to tall trees or
displacement. other vegetation that could propagate wind-induced
vibrations through the roots. Always lay the cables flat
on the ground, not draped over branches or rocks. You
may also need to restrain the E-lines to limit wind-
induced noise. Use the materials at hand, such as

rocks, broken branches, or mounds of dirt or snow to Placement. Because all system components carry
hold down the cables every metre or so. electric current, they all generate magnetic fields that
can degrade the data. Therefore, component
Traffic. In general, avoid areas subject to vehicle,
separation is important. Whenever possible, you should
pedestrian, or animal traffic. If you must run an E-line
place each sensor in a different quadrant formed by the
across a pathway, bury the cable completely to prevent dipoles, as far from the V8 as the connecting cable
disturbance. If you must run a cable across a road, look
allows. In any case, the instrument and each of the
for drainage pipes crossing underneath that could be
sensors must be separated from the others by at least
used to pass the E-lines through. Otherwise, use a 5m.
commercial wire-protection cover designed for the
purpose. Be aware that data quality will be greatly The horizontal coils are normally aligned with the
reduced by passing vehicles. telluric dipoles, as carefully oriented and level as
possible, buried in shallow trenches. The coil placed
Set up the magnetic sensors. The V8 acquires the
with its free end pointing north is referred to as Hx. The
natural magnetic signal using coil or loop sensors.
Three kinds of sensors are available: coil with its free end pointing east is Hy.
• MTC-50 coils, for MT soundings. The third coil, Hz, should be set as precisely vertical as
• MTC-30 coils, for AMT soundings. possible in a hole deep enough that the entire coil can
• AL-100 air-loops, used in place of vertical coils. be buried (although you can bury it partially and then
mound earth over the top if necessary). This vertical
Usually, two sensors are placed horizontally and one
coil is the sensor most susceptible to electrical coupling
vertically. However, depending on the application, the
with the E-lines, so place it as far from the other
vertical sensor may be omitted.
components as possible.
Substitute an air-loop if necessary. In terrain 0°
where a hole cannot be dug deep enough to even Hy Hz true or
partially bury the vertical coil, you can substitute an 90° magnetic
air-loop sensor. The loop is laid out flat on the ground north
in a square, restrained by rocks or other weights, or V8
shallowly buried. Unlike coil sensors, an air-loop is not 90°
shielded, and is therefore more affected by cultural Ey dipole
0°
noise than coils are.
Ex dipole
Hx
Identify and orient correctly. It is critically
important to identify and orient the sensors correctly.
Coil sensors must be aligned so that the free end of Hx
Fig. 13-6: Example layout with three coils correctly oriented (not to
points north (connector points south), and the free end
scale).
of Hy points east (connector points west). This
alignment is intuitive when the coils are placed north If an air-loop is used for the Hz channel, it must be
and east of the V8 because the connectors face the oriented so that, when viewed from inside the loop, the
instrument and the cables run directly to it. However, if cable exits from the pre-amplifier toward the right.
the coils are placed south or west of the instrument, (See Figure 13-7.)
the connector must face away from the instrument, so
the cables loop back to it. (See Figure 13-6.)

0° processing; however, it is better to lay out the site

0°
true or correctly to begin with. Errors in laying out an air-loop
magnetic cannot be corrected during data processing.
Hx
north
Adjust for sensor difficulties. Use the same techniques
V8 as for E-line difficulties to deal with excess cable, wind,
90° and traffic. You can usually avoid obstructions by
Ey dipole
placing the sensor in a different quadrant.
Ex dipole
Hz Hy Submersion in rain water is a further consideration with
90° sensors. Although they can withstand moisture, it is
better to position them on higher ground where
Fig. 13-7: Example layout with two coils and an air-loop correctly possible.
oriented (not to scale).
Measure and record electrode resistance and dipole
voltages. When all the connections have been made to
In all cases, you must note the serial numbers of the
the instrument but before turning on the power, take
coils before burying them, and record on the Layout
measurements of the electrical characteristics of the
Sheet which sensor is used as Hx, Hy, and Hz. Without
site.
this information, you cannot reliably process the data,
because there is no way to associate the correct sensor Dipole voltages. Start by recording the AC and DC
calibration files with the magnetic channels. potentials on the dipoles. These measurements will
help you choose the best setting for gain when you
Some errors in laying out Hx and Hy coils can be program the instrument.
corrected using advanced techniques in data
When measuring dipole voltages, use a digital The higher current from an analog meter is also the
voltmeter. Analog meters are not sensitive enough to reason to measure dipole voltages (with a digital
measure accurately in the 200mV range encountered in meter) first. The analog meter could leave a residual
MT surveys. charge on the electrodes, causing errors if the digital
readings are taken afterwards.
Measure each type of voltage on the N-S and E-W
dipoles. Again, lower values are better. Values ≥150mV Measure the resistance of each E-line and each dipole,
AC may indicate the presence of power lines or other and record the values on the Layout Sheet. In other
electromagnetic noise sources close to the site. words, measure from the instrument ground terminal
to each of the E-line terminals, and again between each
High DC potentials can also mean a faulty electrode. channel’s pair of E-line terminals. A significant
Test for this condition by measuring the voltage from
difference between the dipole resistance and the sum
the V8 ground terminal to each of the E-line terminals.
of the corresponding E-line resistances indicates a
Significantly higher potential on one electrode indicates problem with the layout or a faulty measurement.
that it should be replaced.
Note To accurately measure contact resistance ≥ 2000 Ω,
Unfortunately, apart from relocating the entire site,
you must disconnect the E-lines from the instrument.
there is no way to improve high readings caused by Measure from the ground terminal to each E-line end,
noise. and between the two E-line ends of each dipole.
Electrode contact resistance. When measuring

In general, the lower the contact resistance, the better.
contact resistance, use an analog ohmmeter. An analog
High contact resistance limits the upper range of
meter produces more current than a digital meter (mA
frequencies that can be acquired. If you encounter
versus µA), and is therefore more accurate in the
presence of self-potential on the E-lines.

resistance ≥2000Ω, you may be able to reduce it using unless GPS lock has been achieved (even if only
one of these methods: briefly). You can verify GPS lock by looking at the
• Lift the electrode, add more salt water to the mud, status bar at the bottom of the V8 display or by tapping
and rebury the electrode. the GPS button on the RXUPilot main window.
• Move the electrode to a new hole a short distance It can take anywhere from 30s to 30min for GPS lock
away. There may have been a large rock directly to be achieved, depending on factors such as limited
under the first hole. direct view of the sky, or distance from the last site
• Replace the dirt in the hole with a mixture of salt where the instrument was used.
water and either Bentonite (driller’s mud) or “kitty
litter”—granulated clay for litter boxes. Usually, lock is achieved within 10min. If it takes
longer, try relocating the antenna or substituting
Start up and verify operation. Once the site is properly another antenna or cable.
laid out and tested, the instrument can be powered on.
If you did not load a standard STARTUP.TBL file on the Tip If equipment has been shipped a long distance (for
instance, on initial delivery from Phoenix), GPS lock can
CompactFlash card, you will have to set up the take a long time. To speed up the process, reset the
parameters for your data acquisition in the V8 MT/ GPS receiver: disconnect the GPS antenna. From the
AMT Site Setup and MT/AMT Acquisition Setup Setup menu, choose Options and Status and select GPS
windows. You will have to set up the RXU using the Reset. Reconnect the GPS antenna.
RXUPilot program.
Protect the equipment. Before leaving the site, take
It is important at this stage to verify that the steps to protect the equipment as required. You should
instrument has acquired “GPS lock”—contact with at always protect the instrument with a tarpaulin or
least four GPS satellites. Data acquisition cannot begin sunshade. Wrap the tarpaulin tightly to protect from
snow, rain and condensation, or loosely (ventilated) to Retrieve the equipment. At the end of the data
protect from the heat of the sun. In very hot climates, acquisition period, the crew retrieves the equipment. In
take the instrument out of its carrying case and erect a AMT surveys, retrieval might happen several times in a
sunshade over it to provide maximum ventilation and day. In MT surveys, retrieval usually happens the next
protection from direct sun. In some circumstances, it morning. The crew returns to the site to verify that it is
may also be necessary to post a guard at the site. undisturbed and to pick up the equipment. If there are
problems, it’s easier to repair the installation and take
Warning In hot climates, failure to protect the instrument a second sounding than to remove the equipment and
from direct sunlight may result in equipment have to return later.
! damage. (This warning applies whether the
instrument is powered or not.) The retrieval routine includes a check to make sure
acquisition ended normally, and measurement of
Complete the layout sheet. Verify that all mandatory
contact resistance and battery voltage. These
information has been entered on the Layout Sheet, and
measurements can help identify potential equipment
add any optional information you want to record. (The
problems.
sample Layout Sheet in Appendix D shows mandatory
information in red, optional records in black. Supplies After you shut down the instrument and remove all the
of these Layout Sheets printed on waterproof, tearproof equipment connections, replace the CompactFlash card
paper can be ordered from Phoenix.) with one prepared for the next site. Then gather up all
the equipment and tools, restoring the site as you
Acquire data. Once the site setup and records are
committed to the landowner. Finally, move to the next
complete, the crew can move on to set up the next
site to retrieve more equipment or to set up for a new
survey site. The instrument will automatically acquire
sounding.
data according to the programmed schedule.

266 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Setting up a survey site 266
Processing the data Setting up a survey site
Each evening, you should copy the newly acquired data The next sections explain in more detail how to install
to a PC and to CDs or DVDs for long-term storage. and connect the various parts of the system to acquire
Then use the suite of Phoenix software programs to data at a survey site.
process and perhaps edit the data, to judge the
success of the soundings. Nightly processing allows you Tip A three-person crew can work very efficiently if the
to identify sites that need to be repeated, and schedule crew leader handles operations at the instrument while
them efficiently. the two field workers install the E-lines and/or sensors.
The crew leader orients the field workers as they
position the E-lines. While the workers install the
electrodes and sensors, the leader can install the
Exporting and interpreting the data ground electrode and make other connections and
measurements at the instrument.
The final step in the survey is to carefully edit and then
export the processed data (usually in EDI format) to
your choice of interpretation software.
Verifying your location
Refer to the Data Processing User Guide for instructions
on using the suite of software programs. Ensure that you are at the right site number and
location as defined on the survey map. Use a handheld
GPS locator or other reliable method to be sure of your
location.
Choosing the site centre
Scan the general area to locate the best place for the
instrument, at the centre of the site.
To centre the site:

1. Take a quick sighting with a handheld compass and
allow enough room to the north, south, east, and
west to lay out the E-lines and/or sensors.
(Remember that if there is a slope ≥20°, you may
want to extend an E-line to compensate.)
2. Choose a dry spot that will stay dry if it rains.
3. Stay clear of noise sources (power lines, roads and
paths, railways, etc.) and overhead obstructions.
Fig. 13-8: Instrument and battery positioned on tarpaulin.
4. Spread out a 1m by 2m tarpaulin at the chosen
centre and set the instrument and battery on it
near one short edge.
Note In all cases, allow enough room to keep the

Setting up telluric dipoles
instrument at least 1m away from the dipole
electrodes, and the sensors 5m away from the E-lines,
(E-lines)
to avoid electromagnetic interference. Except at magnetic-only sites, the next step is to set up
the dipoles, or E-lines. Although experienced crews
267 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Setting up telluric dipoles (E-lines) 267

often orient the dipoles using a handheld compass, for 2. If you are keeping track of equipment deployment,
greatest accuracy, you should use a compass on a then record the electrode number and/or cable
tripod. number on the Layout Sheet.
3. Sighting with the compass at the site centre, guide
Tip To save time in the field, use coloured adhesive tape to the field worker while the worker pulls the E-line
mark the length of half the desired dipole on precut E-
line cables. As the field worker pulls the cable end away
(and tape measure if necessary) in the direction of
from the site centre, the crew leader can pay out the the dipole.
cable and call a halt when the tape marker is reached.
With this method, the workers only have to use a tape Tip If you can pick out a landmark in the distance that
measure when the standard layout can’t be followed. aligns well with the dipole, you can simply direct the
worker to walk straight toward it.
To set up the dipoles: Be sure that no metal objects such as belt buckles,
vehicles, or shovels are close enough to distort compass
1. Have a field worker gather up: readings.
• an electrode
4. If you are working as a 3-person crew, save time by
• a shovel having the second field worker simultaneously pull
• a container of salt water (50g/L) the second E-line in the opposite direction, keeping
• a handheld compass aligned with the site centre and the first worker.
• one end of an E-line 5. When the workers arrive at the measured distance,
• (a tape measure, if the layout is non-standard or carefully fine-tune their positions.
the E-lines cables are not pre-marked) 6. Have the workers install the electrodes as described
under “Installing porous pot electrodes” on
page 23.
7. Lay out excess cable in S-shapes. In windy areas, Connecting electrodes to the
have the workers weight down the cables with rocks
or dirt every metre or so as they return to the
instrument
centre. This task can be done by the crew leader after burying
8. Repeat this procedure for the second dipole. the ground electrode, and while the workers are setting
up the dipoles and/or sensors.
Tip If you decide to use a handheld compass at the site
centre, it’s good practice to scuff a mark in the soil To connect the electrodes:
under each foot as you orient the first half of each
dipole. When you turn to orient the other half, don’t 1. Connect the ground electrode to the GND terminal
simply swivel around on one foot—you’ll be about a first.
metre off centre. Instead, make sure to place your feet
back in the two scuff marks after you turn. Tip To identify the dipole electrodes, tie a loose single
Also, have the assistants use their compasses to verify overhand knot about 40cm from the end of the North E-
the accuracy of the dipole orientation by sighting from line cable before connecting it to the instrument. Tie
each end of the dipole to the other, through the site two overhand knots in the East cable, three in the South
centre. cable, and four in the West cable. With this method,
even if the lines become disorganized around the
instrument, it will be easy to verify that the cables are
connected to the correct terminals.

2. Connect the four E-lines to their appropriate
terminals (see Fig. 13-9 and Fig. 13-10): West
East
• North electrode to channel 1 red terminal South
North
• South electrode to channel 1 black terminal
• East electrode to channel 2 red terminal
• West electrode to channel 2 black terminal
3. Double check that the correct electrode is
connected to each terminal.
Fig. 13-10: RXU terminal connections for MT/AMT.

North East
South West
Measuring electrical characteristics
For proper data processing and as a check on the
condition of the equipment and the installation, you
must measure and record several electrical
characteristics of the site. At sites with magnetic
channels, the crew leader can make these electrical
Fig. 13-9: V8 terminal connections for MT/AMT.
measurements while the workers are installing the
sensors (see “Setting up magnetic sensors” on
page 273).
For best results, use a digital voltmeter and an analog To test for faulty electrodes:
ohmmeter, in that order. 1. Using a digital voltmeter at the instrument,
measure the AC or DC potential in mV between the
Tip To improve accuracy when using the ohmmeter and GND terminal and each of the two terminals forming
voltmeter, take every measurement twice, reversing the
polarity the second time. Record the average of the two
the dipole that has the high reading.
values. 2. If the total potential of the dipole is significantly
different from the sum of the potentials of its two
To measure AC and DC potentials: electrodes, the electrode with the higher potential is
probably faulty. Replace it with a different electrode
1. Using a digital voltmeter at the instrument,
and repeat all electrical measurements.
measure the AC potential in mV between the
channel 1 (Ex) terminals and between the channel 2
To measure contact resistance:
(Ey) terminals, recording each measurement on the
1. Using an analog ohmmeter at the instrument,
Layout Sheet.
measure the resistance in kΩ between the GND
2. Measure and record the DC potentials (in mV) in terminal and each of the E-line terminals, recording
the same way. each measurement on the Layout Sheet.
If AC potential approaches 150mV or higher, there may be a 2. If any of the electrodes has a resistance >2000 Ω,
strong noise source nearby. A DC potential in the same range consider taking steps to reduce the contact resis-
may indicate a faulty electrode. Little can be done about a noise
tance (add more salt water or driller’s mud, relocate
source, but you can test for faulty electrodes.
the electrode).

Note To accurately measure contact resistance ≥ 2000 Ω, E-line checklist

you must disconnect the E-lines from the instrument.
Measure from the ground terminal to each E-line end, Use this checklist to verify that your set-up is correct.
and between the two E-line ends of each dipole.
• Are the dipole orientations correct?
3. Measure and record the resistance between the • Are the dipole lengths correct?
channel 1 terminals. • Have cable splices been waterproofed with
4. Measure and record the resistance between the electrician’s tape?
channel 2 terminals. • Are the cable ends correctly identified with knots
5. If the total resistance of either dipole is significantly and connected to the right terminals?
different from the resistance to ground of each of • Has excess cable been laid in S-shapes, no closer
its electrodes, there is a problem with the instal- than 5m from the ends?
lation—usually the ground electrode is at fault. • Do the cables lie flat on the ground?
Double check all cables and connections, test the • Are the cables restrained with rocks or dirt (in
electrodes as just described, and repeat the resis- windy areas)?
tance measurements. • Are cables that cross pathways completely buried?
• Have you accounted for excessive slope?
• Have you made all the necessary electrical
measurements?
Setting up magnetic sensors from the V8, from other sensors, and from the
dipoles. However, stay clear of noise sources
Normally, all sensors are coil-type, but if the vertical (power lines, roads and paths, railways, etc.).
component (Hz) is required and the ground is too rocky 2. If you must place more than one sensor in a
for a coil to be buried, an air-loop sensor can be quadrant to avoid noise or difficult terrain, keep the
substituted. sensors, dipoles, and the V8 separated by at least
5m.
3. For each sensor, try to choose a dry spot, preferably
Choosing sensor locations one that will stay dry if it rains.
In most cases, you will already have laid out two
dipoles. The dipoles form four quadrants with the V8 at
Installing coil sensors
the intersection.
Follow the instructions under “Installing and connecting
Use the dipole quadrants as a guide, and place each
magnetic sensors” on page 25 to install the MTC-30 or
magnetic sensor in a separate quadrant whenever
MTC-50 coil sensors, or the AL-100 air loop sensor.
possible.
If you are measuring only magnetic channels, simply

keep the sensors widely separated.
Connecting the sensors to the V8
If you are using an instrument with magnetic channels
To choose sensor locations: only, install a ground electrode before connecting
1. Use the length of the connecting cables as a guide, sensors. (See “Installing porous pot electrodes” on
and plan to place each sensor as far as possible
273 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Setting up magnetic sensors 273

274 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Setting up magnetic sensors 274
page 23.) Then connect the sensors. (See “Installing
and connecting magnetic sensors” on page 25.)
Sensor checklist
Use this checklist to verify that your set-up is correct.
• Do the free ends of the horizontal coils point north
or east, no matter which quadrant they are in?
• Were the coils perfectly level and not disturbed
when buried?
• Have all metal objects been removed from the
vicinity of the sensors?
• Is the Hz coil exactly vertical and completely
covered?
• Does the cable from the Hz air-loop exit from the
pre-amplifier to the right when viewed from inside
the loop?
• Do the cables lie flat on the ground?
• Are the cables restrained with rocks or dirt (in
windy areas)?
• Are cables that cross pathways completely buried?
• Have all serial numbers been correctly recorded?
Setting up the instrument 2. With an RXU, if there is a STARTUP.TBL file on the
CF card, the instrument will follow the instructions
Two final connections must be made to the instrument contained in the file; skip to step 4.
to complete the site setup: the battery and the GPS 3. With a V8, or an RXU if you are not working with a
antenna. pre-configured STARTUP.TBL on a CF card, set up
the site and acquisition parameters as described
To complete the instrument setup: under “Setting up MT/AMT survey and site param-
1. Connect the GPS antenna (see “Connecting the GPS eters” on page 279.
antenna” on page 24). 4. Verify that GPS lock has been achieved.
2. Connect the battery (see “Connecting the external 5. With a V8, select the desired recording command
battery” on page 33). from the Acquisition menu.
Tip When preparing to leave a survey site, always ensure

Powering up the instruments and that the instrument has acquired the four-satellite
minimum. Reposition the GPS antenna or replace the
acquiring data antenna and/or cable if necessary. If you leave the site
without ensuring satellite lock, the instrument may not
Once all the components have been connected, the be able to acquire data, and the site will have to be
instruments can be powered on. resounded.
To power up the instrument : 6. Cover the instrument with the tarpaulin that you
first laid out under it.
1. Push the red POWER switch up to the ON position and
release it. • In warm weather, cover the instrument loosely
for shade, weighting down the tarpaulin but
275 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Setting up the instrument 275

276 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Setting up the instrument 276
leaving the sides open for ventilation. (See
Fig. 13-11.)
Fig. 13-12: In wet or damp conditions, wrap the tarpaulin

tightly.
Fig. 13-11: In warm weather, wrap the tarpaulin loosely.
• In very hot weather (>35°C), take the
• In wet or damp conditions, wrap the tarpaulin instrument out of its carrying case, position it so
tightly, folding the ends under the instrument to the connectors face upward, shade it from the
hold the tarpaulin in place. (See Fig. 13-12.) sun, and ensure there is good ventilation to
prevent damage from overheating. A simple lean-
to sunshade can be constructed from two wooden
or metal poles, stakes, and a tarpaulin. (See
Fig. 13-13.)
Final site checklist
Use this checklist to verify that your set-up is correct.
• Has GPS lock been achieved?
• Is the instrument in record mode?
• Has the Layout Sheet been completed?
Fig. 13-13: In very hot weather, construct a sunshade and • Has the instrument been protected from the
remove the instrument from its carrying case. To maximize the environment using a tarpaulin?
exposed surface area, keep the instrument upright, not lying on
its side. • Have you collected all installation tools?
7. Take any other necessary precautions to protect the

site, and leave the equipment to acquire data.
Retrieving the equipment
Retrieving the equipment from a site is a fairly
straightforward reversal of the steps taken to set up.
When you arrive, check the site and the equipment for
signs of disturbance. You many find cables chewed
through by animals, for example, indicating that the
site will likely have to be re-sounded.
If everything is in order, then retrieve the equipment

using the following procedures.
277 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Retrieving the equipment 277

278 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Retrieving the equipment 278
Shutting down the instrument Tip The recorded contact resistance is an important factor
during data processing, but the resistance changes over
Care must be taken that the instrument has shut down time. The change is probably most rapid just after
properly before battery power is disconnected. If the electrode installation, as the salt water disperses.
instrument has not been programmed to shut down Therefore, during data processing, you may want to use
automatically at the end of data acquisition, you must either the post-acquisition value alone, or an average of
the pre- and post-acquisition values.
shut it down manually. See “Starting and shutting
down the V8” on page 47 and “Starting and shutting
Use the back of the Layout Sheet to record the
down the RXU-3E” on page 132.
measurements.
Remeasuring electrical Collecting the equipment

characteristics
Once you have shut down the instrument and
For complete and accurate records, you should repeat remeasured the electrical characteristics, you can
the electrical measurements (contact resistance and AC disconnect all the equipment and pack it up for use at
and DC potentials) on the dipoles before disconnecting the next survey site.
them. It is also good practice to check the battery
voltage, because a reading below 10V may indicate a To collect the equipment:
worn out battery that should be replaced. 1. Disconnect each E-line and coil it in a large figure-8
shape. Wrap a few layers of electrician’s tape
through the top of the “8” to keep the lines tangle-
free. (Twist the end of the tape back on itself to Tip When coiling sensor cables, avoid damage by letting the
make it easy to take off later.) length of the cable rotate on its axis as you make each
2. Dig up the electrodes, clean off most of the dirt, loop. Otherwise, the cable will become twisted and
and store them in a carrying case containing a few kinked, leading to internal breakage.
centimetres of salt water. (It is important not to let
the electrodes dry out.)
3. Dig up and disconnect the sensors and/or air-loop.
Coil their cables and secure them with a few wraps
Setting up MT/AMT survey
of electrician’s tape. and site parameters
Warning Never pull a coil sensor out of the ground by This section explains how to use the V8 user interface
pulling on the cable. Damage to the cable or to set up site and acquisition parameters. However, it is
! connector can result. Either dig the sensor out strongly recommended that you use the TblEdit
completely, or tie a short length of rope around
program to create a STARTUP.TBL file instead,
the coil before burying it and pull on the rope to
retrieve the coil. especially for an RXU. See Chapter 4 on page 87 for
instructions on using TblEdit.
4. Remember to replace all the protective caps on
cables and connectors, to protect them from dirt To enter the MT/AMT function:
and moisture. • From the main window, choose MT/AMT (press
Ctrl, then type M).
The MT/AMT Site Setup window appears (see Fig. 13-14).
279 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Setting up MT/AMT survey and site parameters 279
Other fields can only be changed the first time you
open the MT/AMT Site Setup window after selecting
the MT/AMT function from the main window. The
information you enter in the setup window is saved on
the CompactFlash card in a file with the extension TBL.
Entering survey information

The Survey Information area of the MT/AMT Site
Setup window allows you to keep some basic records
concerning the survey. Text in each box can be up to 64
characters long, except the Comment text, which can
be 128 characters long. Survey information can be
Fig. 13-14: MT/AMT Site Setup window. changed at any time, regardless of whether the
instrument is recording data or not.
There are three main sections of the MT/AMT Site
Setup window: Setting the North Reference. It is critical that survey
sites are oriented carefully and that the orientation is
• Survey Information
recorded correctly. The North Reference parameter
• Telluric Channels
allows the data processing software to correctly
• Magnetic channels
compensate for magnetic declination and site rotation.
Some fields of the setup window can only be changed
when the instrument is in Pause or Standby mode.
When entering the survey information: 4. When the text fields are complete, press Ctrl, L to
• If you will orient your site to true north (adjusting move to the Line textbox and type the identifier
for magnetic declination in the field), select True you have chosen for the current survey line.
North. 5. Press the Tab key to move to the Site text box and
• If you will orient your site to magnetic north type the identifier you have chosen for the current
(making no adjustment in the field) select Magnetic site on the survey line.
North.
• If you will orient your site to an arbitrary azimuth
on a grid plan, select User Defined. Entering telluric channels
information
To enter the Survey Information:
Use this section of the window to enter information
1. Press Ctrl and type S to move the focus to the
about the electric channels.
Survey Information area.
2. Press the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to move To enter telluric channels information:
the focus to each text box and type the desired
1. Press Ctrl, U to move the focus to the Telluric
information (choose the North reference from the
Channels area.
scrolling list).
2. In each text box, type the corresponding E-line
3. If you chose Magnetic North as the reference,
parameter that you recorded on the Layout Sheet.
enter the local magnetic declination from True
Press the ARROW keys to move from one text box to
North.
another.
Entering magnetic channels Incrementing the station position
information Notice the Next Site button on the MT/AMT Site
Use this section of the window to enter information Setup window. When you complete a station on the
about the magnetic channels. survey line and move to the next station, return to the
MT/AMT Site Setup window and activate this button.
To enter telluric channels information: The V8 will use the Station space, Profile azimuth,
and starting co-ordinates to automatically calculate
1. Press Ctrl, M to move the focus to the Magnetic
new values for the station co-ordinates.
Channels area.
2. In each text box, enter the corresponding
parameter that you recorded on the Layout Sheet. Completing MT/AMT site setup
Press the ARROW keys to move from one text box to
another. When you are satisfied with the site setup parameters,
exit the setup window and set up the acquisition
3. If no Hz sensor is used, leave the Hz serial
parameters.
number text box blank.
To end MT/AMT Site Setup:
Note Be sure to record the serial numbers of the sensors
correctly. If incorrect information is entered here, the • Either move the focus to the Done button and
wrong calibration files will be used. press Enter, or press Esc, or press Ctrl, D.
The MT/AMT Site Setup window closes and you are returned to
the MT/AMT Acquisition window.
Setting up MT/AMT The lowest frequencies are sampled continuously. To
keep files to reasonable sizes, the two higher frequency
acquisition parameters bands are sampled only periodically.
The acquisition parameters control the acquisition The user defines a time slot of duration between 0 and
schedule, the size and type of data records, and 3600s for periodic sampling. (This corresponds to the
various filters intended to reduce the effects of cultural time slot duration of 0 to 59 minutes in an MTU.) The
noise. V8 samples the two higher frequency bands alternately
at the beginning of each time slot in a pattern that
The acquisition schedule can specify both the date and repeats each hour. (Regardless of the defined duration,
time, or it can be generic and specify only the time. A a new time slot pattern begins at the start of each UTC
generic schedule will take effect on whatever day the hour. For this reason, choose a time slot length that will
V8 is powered on. result in an integer number of time slots per hour.)
Figures 13-15 and 13-16 illustrate the way the bands

Frequency ranges are sampled:
Phoenix instruments can acquire data in four frequency

bands (numbered 2 through 5), each with different
characteristics. For AMT data, the instruments acquire
Bands 2, 3, and 4. For MT data, the instruments
acquire Bands 3, 4, and 5.
283 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Setting up MT/AMT acquisition parameters 283

Time Slot 0 1 2 scans). Up to four such records can be captured at the
beginning of each even-numbered time slot. A higher
Band 2
number improves data quality in the frequency range
Band 3 1–3kHz where signal strength is very low, but also
increases file size. Band 2 is not used when the
Band 4
instrument acquires MT data because only the AMTC-30
0–3600s = 0.1s data record sensor is designed to acquire this range.
= 1s data record
Band 3 refers to frequencies up to about 1000Hz. This
Fig. 13-15: Sampling scheme (AMT data).
band is the intermediate range in AMT soundings and
the high range in MT soundings. Band 3 is sampled at
Time Slot 0 1 2
2.4kHz, with each record starting on the UTC second
Band 3 for a duration of 1s (2400 scans). Up to two such
Band 4
records can be captured at the beginning of each odd-
numbered time slot.
Band 5
Band 4 refers to frequencies up to about 60Hz. This
0–3600s band is the low range in AMT soundings and the
= 1s data record
intermediate range in MT soundings. In AMT soundings,
Fig. 13-16: Sampling scheme (MT data). Band 4 is sampled continuously at 150Hz. In MT
soundings, Band 4 is sampled at 150Hz, with each
Band 2 refers to frequencies up to about 10 800Hz. record starting on the UTC second for a duration of 1s
This band is sampled at 24kHz, with each record (150 scans). Up to 16 such records can be captured at
starting on the UTC second for a duration of 0.1s (2400 the beginning of each even-numbered time slot.
Band 5 refers to frequencies up to about 6Hz. This The V8 must be in Setup mode in order to change
band is the low range in MT soundings and is not used acquisition parameters.
in AMT soundings. Band 5 is sampled continuously at
15Hz. To put the V8 into Setup mode:
Combining instrument types. When an MTU sampling • From the Acquisition menu, choose Setup. (If
schedule is set to V5-2000, its sampling rate is Setup is disabled, it is already the current mode.)
compatible with that of the V8 and MTU-A. The shaded
areas in Table 13-1 show this compatibility. If you
intend to combine V8 and MTU and/or MTU-A
instruments in a survey, be sure to use the V5-2000
setting in the MTU instruments. Fig. 13-17: The Acquisition menu, showing the V8 in Setup
mode.
Table 13-1: MTU⁄MTU-A sampling rates (number
of samples per one-second record).
To set up acquisition parameters:
MTU V8 and MTU-A • From the Setup menu, choose Acquisition
Band V5 Compatible V5- Data Type Parameters, or simply press Ctrl, A.
50Hz 60Hz 2000 MT AMT The MT/AMT Acquisition Parameters dialog box opens
(Fig. 13-18).
2 — — — — 24 000
3 2560 3072 2400 2400 2400
4 320 384 150 150 150
5 24 24 15 15 —

To set the Data Type:
• In the Data type area, select either AMT or MT.
Fig. 13-19: Setting the data type.
Setting up filtering and coupling

The low pass filter (LP Filter), Line Frequency filter,
Fig. 13-18: MT/AMT Acquisition Parameters dialog box.
page 60. Choose values for these settings that are
Setting the Data Type suitable for the survey conditions.
A V8 can acquire AMT data (frequency Bands 2, 3, and

4) using AMTC-30 sensors, or MT data (Bands 3, 4, and Setting gain
5) using MTC-50 sensors. You must set the data type
parameter in order to optimize the instrument circuitry The “correct” setting for E and H gain is dependent on
for your purpose. local conditions of signal strength and noise. The
objective is to set the gain as high as possible, without
causing saturated records. As you build experience with
your equipment in your locale, you will be able to judge
the best settings to start with, and when to modify when too many saturations have occurred. See
them. “Customizing the V8 by setting options” on page 67.
You can also monitor acquisition by choosing
Table 13-2 shows the peak signal strength that can be
Acquisition Status from the Acquisition menu. See
recorded at each gain setting.
“Monitoring MT/AMT acquisition” on page 290 for
Table 13-2: Gain factors and signal strength instructions.
Gain Setting Peak Signal Strength
0.25 10.0V
Setting acquisition times
1 2.5V For MT surveys, the instruments are usually installed
during the day and left unattended overnight to acquire
4 0.6V
data. The V8 allows you to set up an appropriate
16 0.15V schedule to start and stop acquisition automatically. To
save space on the CompactFlash card, you can also
If gains are set too high, records will be saturated and program the instrument to acquire high frequency data
data quality will be poor. To evaluate your gain settings, for a shorter period of time—a subset of the overall
monitor the instrument during acquisition. The number duration.
of saturated records appears in the status bar (“Sat’d In the following example, Band 5 is acquired for 9
Recs:”). If more than a few records are saturated,
hours starting at 21:00, but Bands 3 and 4 are
reduce the gain.
acquired for only 5.5 hours, starting at 23:00.
You can set a warning threshold in the Options and
Status screen, so that the status bar will change colour

If the start time has already passed when the V8 is powered but
21:00 23:00 04:30 06:00 the current time is less than 12 hours after that start time,
acquisition will start immediately. Otherwise, the V8 will idle in
Bands 3 and 4 acquisition Standby mode until the start time.
Band 5 acquisition 2. Type the Data record end time in the same format.
3. To record high frequency data throughout the entire
sounding, leave High frequency record start time
For AMT data, bear in mind that the signal strength in
that frequency range is about 10 times greater at night and High frequency record end time set to
00:00:00.
than during the day. You may want to acquire high
frequency data for a subset of the total duration by 4. If you want to reduce file size by recording the two
specifying a High frequency record start time and High high frequency bands for a subset of the total
frequency record end time so that this Band is acquired duration, type a time for High frequency record
after sunset. start time that is after Data record start time and
before Data record end time; type a time for High
Note All times are UTC, in the format HH:MM:SS frequency record end time that is after High
(hours:minutes:seconds). To specify a date, use the frequency record start time and before Data record
format YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day) followed by a end time.
space, then the time (YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS).
To set acquisition times: Setting sampling parameters

1. Type the Data record start time in the format
As explained under “Frequency ranges” on page 283,
described above.
higher frequencies are not sampled continuously. You
must define how many records are to be acquired, and To check the storage space required:
how often. 1. Activate the Calc disk required button and
examine the status bar to see how many
To set the number of samples per record: megabytes of storage your settings will require:
• In each Records of Band x per slot text box, type a
value within the range shown in parentheses.
2. Verify that your CompactFlash card has enough
To set the time slot length: storage space.
• Type a value for the Time slot length in seconds,
choosing a value that results in an integer number
of time slots each hour.
Acquiring MT/AMT data
Note When setting parameters for a reference site and
survey sites, make sure that the time slot length and When you have completed programming the
sampling parameters are identical in all instruments. acquisition parameters, press Ctrl, D to close the MT/
Data from a reference site cannot be used if its AMT Acquisition Parameters window.
parameters differ from those of the survey sites.
If you are combining V8, MTU, and MTU-A instruments You can override the schedule and start acquisition
in a survey, be aware that the time slot units are immediately, or you can activate the schedule you set
different: an MTU time slot is defined in minutes, up as described earlier.
whereas an MTU-A and V8 time slot is defined in
seconds. On an MTU, be sure to choose the
V5-compatible sampling rate.
289 Chapter 13 MT/AMT Acquiring MT/AMT data 289

To start acquisition immediately regardless of proceeding normally. Use the Acquisition Status
schedule: dialog box to monitor progress (see Fig. 13-20).
• From the Acquisition menu, choose Start
Recording Immediately.
If satellite lock has been achieved, the V8 will enter Record
mode.
To start acquisition according to the schedule:

• From the Acquisition menu, choose Start
Recording by Schedule.
The V8 idles until the scheduled start time. If satellite lock has
been achieved by the scheduled start time, the V8 will begin
recording.
Monitoring MT/AMT acquisition

Unlike controlled-source methods where records are
stacked and results are displayed in real time, MT and
AMT methods require post-processing of the time Fig. 13-20: MT/AMT Acquisition Status dialog box.
series. Therefore, it can be important to monitor the
acquisition to ensure that gains are properly set, The first cell of the Status spreadsheet displays the
channels are all connected, and that acquisition is instrument mode. From this you can tell if the
instrument is recording, waiting to start recording, or the problem and adjust the gain appropriately. See
idling after recording. “Setting gain” on page 286 for instructions.
The next three cells display the total number of records

To monitor MT or AMT acquisition:
acquired and also the number of bad records and
1. From the Acquisition menu, choose Acquisition
saturated records.
Status.
Records marked Bad usually indicate a problem with
The MT/AMT Acquisition Status dialog box appears.
the instrument; contact Phoenix Technical Support.
2. Evaluate the values for each of the cells in the
Saturated records indicate gain is set too high. The
Acquisition Status spreadsheet.
values for AC and DC signal on each channel in the
remaining cells of the spreadsheet will help you identify

Appendix
Time Zone Map
293 Appendix A 293

294 Appendix A Time Zone Map 294
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Appendix
Magnetic Declination Resources
297 Appendix B 297

298 Appendix B Magnetic Declination Resources 298
The following Internet sites (valid July 2005) provide http://gsc.nrcan.gc.ca/geomag/field/mdcalc_e.php
background information on magnetic declination. These
http://www.thecompassstore.com/decvar.html#
sites also include on-line or downloadable calculators
that provide an approximate magnetic declination, http://geomag.usgs.gov/index.html
given a latitude, longitude, and date.
For further resources, type the terms “magnetic
declination”, with or without “chart map” or other
relevant terms into an Internet search engine such as:
http://www.google.com
Appendix
This Appendix provides specifications for the V8.
The values and specifications given here are typical,

and are subject to change without notice. They are not
claimed to be worst-case specifications.
V8 Specifications
299 Appendix C 299

300 Appendix C Specifications 300
General Clocking and synchronization

Sample times are synchronized with UTC using a
combination of global positioning system (GPS) signals
Processors
and stable oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO)
• 586 main processor clock.
• auxiliary processors
Long-term absolute accuracy when locked to GPS is
1µs or better.
Channels
Typical short-term stability governed by OCXO during
Instruments acquire and store up to seven electric field GPS dropouts is ±5 x 10-9.
channels (E), and three magnetic field channels (H;
standard or TDEM), with an overall maximum of 8 Any Phoenix GPS-equipped devices (MTUs, current
channels simultaneously. sources, related controllers, etc.) can be synchronized
at any location worldwide without communication
among the units.
Sampling
Frequency range. 10 000Hz to 0.00005Hz (20 000s). Calibration
Resolution. One analog-to-digital converter per Units perform multi-frequency self-calibration and
channel, 24 bits, 96 000 samples/second (main magnetic sensor calibration on command. The resulting
channels); 16–24 bits, up to 5MHz (TDEM channels). files contain a complete calibration of the instrument or
sensor over its useful frequency range, independent of
the mode of operation (e.g., line frequency, AC/DC
coupling). For more information on file format and
External connections
content, see “Calibrating the V8” on page 72. Multi-pin connectors are military grade,
environmentally sealed.
Power
Input. 12VDC
Ground
Consumption. Varies to a maximum of approximately An external binding post provides the case ground,
15W, depending on the geophysical application and the which should be connected to a porous pot electrode.
radio power setting, if used.
Protection. Units shut down automatically when battery Electric channel inputs
voltage is low. All inputs are protected against power
surges. Units are equipped with four binding posts, marked
WNSE for ease of cable connection in MT and AMT
applications. Additional numeric markings identify the
Data storage and transfer binding posts for use in separate- or shared-electrode
modes for other applications.
Calibration and acquisition data are stored on a
removable CompactFlash card of up to 512MB capacity.
Data can be transferred to a PC by physically

Battery connector
transferring the CompactFlash card. • Circular, 4-pin, shell size 8.

• Surge protection and overload protection on all the 2.4000–2.4835GHz band; in others, the 902–928
pins. MHz band.
• Pin A: Battery 1, +12VDC.
• Pin B: Battery 2, +12VDC.
•
•
Pin C: Battery common.
Pin D: Battery common.
Mechanical and environmental
Case. Environmentally-sealed diecast aluminum.
GPS antenna connector Weight. 7kg.

• Circular, BNC-type. Dimensions. 355mm x 250mm x 110mm.
Operating temperature. –20°C to +50°C.
Radio antenna connector
• Reverse TNC bulkhead connector.
User interface
Display. 640 x 480 full-colour sunlight-readable LCD.
Communications Keypad. 67-key full ASCII sealed keypad.
The V8 and RXU auxiliary receivers incorporate Software. Proprietary graphical user interface.
frequency-hopping spread-spectrum radios operating
in the unlicensed ISM bands. In some markets this is
Related products •
•
1Hz
1/60Hz
Several other products for similar or specialized
Geophysical current source control output:
applications are available or under development.
• 0.001Hz to 10kHz
Control waveforms are referenced to zero phase at UTC

RXU-3
2000 Jan 01 00:00:00.
A radio-capable 2- or 3-channel (E) receiver used in a
network of V8 and RXU instruments. Provides an
infrared interface to allow setup and monitoring from V8-EX
Palm OS® handheld devices.
An expansion cabinet that attaches to the V8, providing
a lithium-ion battery pack and additional binding posts
for multi-channel acquisition.
RXU-TM
A radio-capable single channel transmitter controller
and monitor used in a network of V8 and RXU MTU family
instruments. Provides an infrared interface to allow
System2000 receivers, 2–5 channels for MT data.
setup and monitoring from Palm OS® handheld
devices.
UTC signal output:

MTU-A family
• 921 600Hz System2000 receivers, 2–5 channels for AMT data.

MTU-TXC MTU-2ES, MTU-5S
A radio-enabled control unit used to synchronize other Also used in monitoring applications, these instruments
equipment, such as current sources, to System 2000 use a serial interface for control and data transfer,
and System 2000.net equipment. Specifications similar typically connecting to a fibre optic or copper wire
to the RXU-TM. modem.
CMU-1 MTU-5LR
A current monitor that provides feedback to the MTU- Used in surveys with extended depths of investigation,
TXC on the actual transmitted waveform. these instruments employ a ring-core fluxgate
magnetic sensor and low sample rates.
MTU-2ESD, MTU-5ESD
MTU-AI family
Used in remote reference and monitoring applications,
these instruments use a 33.6kb/s dialup telephone These instruments, under development in 2003–04,
connection for control and data transfer. provide an infrared interface to allow setup and
monitoring from Palm OS® handheld devices.
Appendix
This appendix contains a sample Layout Sheet as used
by Phoenix survey personnel. You can design and print
your own Layout Sheets, or order a supply from
Phoenix, printed on the same waterproof, tear-proof
paper as this User Guide.
Sample Layout Sheet
305 Appendix D 305

306 Appendix D Sample Layout Sheet 306
Obtaining a supply of Layout Table D-1: Layout Sheet part numbers
Sheets Content Part Number

Binder only 7355
To purchase Layout Sheets from Phoenix, send us your
30 Layout Sheets for left-handed writers 7356
order using these part numbers:
30 Layout Sheets for right-handed writers 7357
Binder plus 30 left-handed sheets 8081
Binder plus 30 right-handed sheets 8082
Appendix
Sample Equipment Checklist
309 Appendix E 309

Phoenix Geophysics Limited
MT 5-Component Survey Equipment Checklist
Use one column for each scheduled site

Instrument & Components ID Number ID Number ID Number ID Number
MTU Box
Flash Memory
Battery
Battery Cable
GPS Antenna
GPS cable
Pot 1
Pot 2
Pot 3
Pot 4
Pot 5
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Airloop
Sensor cable 1
Sensor cable 2
Sensor cable 3
3-way Sensor connector
E-line cable 1
E-line cable 2
E-line cable 3
E-line cable 4
Ground pot cable
Parallel cable, PC
PC
Tools Qty Req'd Qty Loaded

Shovel
Level
Electrician's Tape
Coloured Tape
Ranger Compass
Brunton Compass
Brunton Mount
Brunton Tripod
Cable Reel & Cable
Measuring Tape
Wire stripper/cutter
Water
Salt
Bentonite or granular clay
Layout Binder & Sheets
Pencils
Map
Analog Ohmmeter
Digital Voltmeter
GPS Receiver
Appendix
Meazura Quick Start Guide
311 Appendix F 311

Quick Start Guide
Front View
Module Fasteners
Rear View
Top View
MZIO™ Module
Touch
sensitive
screen Infrared Port
Stylus
Graffiti Home Calculator Battery Pack

Pad Menu Find
Bottom View
Backlight
Power
Center
Directional Battery Clip
Arrows
Communications and
Charging Connector
1. Setup
Meazura™ Setup
When powering up your Meazura™ for the first time, press the Power button and follow the on-screen
instructions to setup the device. This includes calibration of the touch sensitive screen and setting your
location, date and time. During this procedure, you can at your option take a Graffiti writing tutorial
for entering text and special characters on your Meazura™.
PC Setup
To communicate between the Meazura™ and your PC, you must install
‘Palm Desktop’ located on your CD-ROM included with your kit.
1. Exit all programs, including those that may be running in the taskbar.
2. Insert the Meazura™ Software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. The install menu should appear automatically. If it doesn’t then
navigate to ‘install_menu.exe’ located on your CD-ROM using
Windows Explorer.
4. Follow the on-screen instruction for installing ‘Palm Desktop’.
2. Connect
• Plug the Communications cable into a USB or Serial port on your computer (as pictured
in figure 2a/b below).
• Connect the communications cable to the communication connector located at the bottom
of the Meazura™ (as pictured in figure 1 left).
• Ensure the Meazura™ Desktop Software CD-ROM is inserted into your computers CD-
ROM drive.
• Press the power button to turn on your Meazura™ and perform a HotSync operation
following the instructions in step 4 to commence the driver install for your Meazura™.
• Follow all instructions on your PC and your Meazura™.
Figure 2a Figure 2b
Figure 1
USB Connection Serial Connection
3. Charging
Figure 3 • Connect your AC adaptor to the bottom of your communications cable (as pictured below
in figure 4).
• Connect the communications cable to the comms connector located at the bottom of your
Meazura™ (as pictured below in figure 4).
• Ensure your connection setup is the same as pictured in figure 3 left to commence charging.
Figure 4 WARNING: For safety reasons, ensure the Meazura™ is

completely dry before using the electrical charger.
(Charging time varies depending on battery level)
4. HotSync®
• Ensure Palm Desktop software is installed on your computer (see step
1 ‘Setup’)
• Connect the communications cable to your Meazura™ and your
computer as per instructions over page in step 2 (‘Connect’).
• On your Meazura™ RDA, tap on the HotSync icon (as pictured left).
• Tap the large icon in the center of the screen to start the HotSync
operation.
• Follow all instructions on your PC and your Meazura™.
5. Calibration
This procedure calibrates the touch sensitive screen on your Meazura™
• Tap on the ‘Prefs’ icon

• From the dropdown list, choose “Digitizer”
• Follow on-screen instructions
Other preferences for setting up your handheld can be found in the drop
down list, such as “Date and Time”. To adjust these extra settings,
simply tap the setting choice in dropdown list and follow the on-screen
instructions.
6. Resetting
Soft Reset
(no loss of data)
Press and release Power and Backlight button together
Hard Reset
(restores Meazura™ to factory settings)
1. 1. Press and hold the Power and Backlight button together then release the Backlight button only
2. Release the Power button when the Palm Powered logo appears
3. Follow on-screen instructions
2.
=
7. Contrast/Backlight
Backlight
To turn on the backlight, press the Backlight button (pictured right)
Contrast
To adjust the contrast of the screen, hold the backlight button for 1.5 seconds
to bring up the contrast slider on-screen (as pictured left).
• Use your stylus to drag the slider bar until you reach your desired contrast,
then click ‘Done’.
All Content Copyright © 2004 Aceeca Limited - All Rights Reserved. Aceeca, Meazura, MEZ1000 and RDA are all trademarks of Aceeca Limited. Palm OS, HotSync,
Graffiti and the Palm Powered logo are registered tradem arks and Palm Powered is a trademark of Palm Trademark Holding Company, LLC. and are used by
Aceeca Limited under express license with PalmSource, Inc. All other trademarks referred to in this document are the properties of their respective owners.
QSG -ME Z1 000 -0 902 04
Index
acquisition parameters array layouts
Symbols CSAMT, 223 CSAMT, 218
*.tbl files, 53 MT/AMT, 283 SIP, 200
®, RXUPilot parameters, 119 SIP, 209 arrays, illustrations
TDEM, 241 CSAMT, 218
Numerics aiming directional antennas with SIP, 201
2.5 GHz, 160 RXUPilot, 124 TDEM, 232
3-person crew, 255 air-loop assembling antenna tripod, 169
900 MHz, 160 calibration, 77 Auto modes, 181
921.6 kHz, 178 layout, 78 AUTO parameter, RXU-TM, 154
pre-amplifier orientation, 261 Auto Stepping, activating on V8, 196
A substitution for coil, 261 Auto-1 mode
ACEECA, 108 AL-100 air-loop, 260 CPFR, 194
acquiring data alligator clamps, battery, 34 frequency stepping pattern, 192
CSAMT, 226 Ampl statistic, RXUPilot, 128 non-pattern frequencies, 191
MT/AMT, 289 AMT schedule, 194
SIP, 212 electrode connections, 21 TPFR, 194
TDEM, 245 signal strength, 288 TTOT, 194
acquisition techniques, 250 automatic current reduction, 195
controlling with RXUPilot, 126 AMTC-30 coils, 250, 284, 286 automatic formatting, Excel, 187
LED indication, 37 analog ohmmeter, 263 automatic modes, 181
antennas and masts, 162 automatic polarity correction, TDEM, 244
apparent resistivity, filter roll-off, 61
313 Index 313

314 Index 314
calibration, 150
B C air-loop sensors, 77
band 2, 284 cable air-loop, tools required, 77
band 3, 284 excess E-line, 258 cancelling, 79
band 4, 284 parallel batteries, 33 cancelling, RXU-3E, 135
baseline data, acquiring after Cagniard, 7 cancelling, RXU-TM or CMU-1, 150
calibration, 84 CAL directory, 72, 74, 133, 143 CMU-1, 145
batteries in parallel, 33 Calc disk required button, 289 coil sensors, 74
battery Calculate Coord button duration, 74, 255
alligator clamps, 34 CSAMT, 222 equipment, 254
capacity, 33 SIP, 208 instrument file name, 72, 133, 143
connecting, 33 calculator, magnetic declination, 298 instrument, tools required, 73, 133, 143
maintenance, 84 programming, 71
V8-EX, 34 RXU-3E, 132
voltage warning, LED indication, 39 RXU-TM, 143
bayonet-lock connectors, 18 sensors
Bentonite, 264 file name, 74
binary format, converting schedule layout, 75
files, 188 tools required, 74
bipolar waveforms, 183 sunlight and, 74
blank row, inserting in spreadsheet, 52 temperature, 72, 133, 143
Box Cal OK, 72 using RXUPilot, 116
Box In Progress, 73 viewing results, 80
Box No Cal, 72 calibration failure, LED indication, 39
box spreadsheet, 55 cancelling calibration, 79
By schedule, file close time, 82 capacity, battery, 33
capital cost, 252
changing calculated co-ordinates,
SIP, 209
changing location, SIP, 214
channel spreadsheet communication content and schedule, coupling, 60
CSAMT, 221 radio, 164 setting, 66
SIP, 207 CompactFlash card SIP, 210, 224, 286
TDEM, 238 installing and removing, 29 vertical sensor and E-lines, 260
channels, specifications, 300 not installed, LED indication, 39 CPFR, 155
checklist compass, handheld at site centre, 269 in Auto-1 mode, 194
E-line, 272 compensating creating a frequency schedule file, 186
equipment, sample, 309 obstructed dipole, 257 CRMX, 196
final site, 277 rotating the site, 258 CSAMT, 217
sensor, 274 slope, 259 acquiring data, 226
CLB file name, 72, 133, 143 component separation, 260 array layouts, 218
clock status, LED indication, 41 configurations, radio, 160 channel spreadsheet, 221
clock, RXUPilot, 115 connecting setting up, 219
clocking and synchronization, battery, 33 CSV files, 186
specifications, 300 electrodes, 20 current
CMU-1, 141 system components, 18 roll-off in Auto-1 mode, 195
calibrating, 145 V8-EX, 34 current sensor, CMU-1, 143
maximum current, 142 connections
setting up, 151 electrodes for MT/AMT, 21 D
Coil Cal OK, 72 order of, 33 data processing, 266
Coil In Progress, 76 specifications, 301 Data record
Coil No Cal, 72 contact resistance, see resistance end time, 288
coils continuous update, RXUPilot, 128 start time, 288
AMTC-30, 250, 284, 286 Controlled Source Audiofrequency data storage and transfer,
MTC-50, 250, 286 Magnetotellurics, 217 specifications, 301
combining instrument types, 285 corner frequency Data Type, setting, 286
Comma Separated Values (CSV) feedback, 62 data, controlling logging, 81
files, 186 high pass filter, 66 date format, 288
comment text, 280 correcting layout errors, 262 declination, see magnetic declination
common operations, 17 cost, capital and operating, 252 depth of investigation, TDEM, 235
315 Index 315

316 Index 316
difficulties, E-line, 257 electrodes equipment
digital voltmeter, 263 connecting, 20, ??–22 calibrating, 254
digits, significant connecting to instrument, 269 collecting, 278
in auto modes, 178 connections for MT/AMT, 21 installation time, 253
specifying frequencies, 178 faulty, 263 inventory and inspection, 255
dipole identifying with E-line knots, 269 maintenance, 84
obstructed, 257 installing, 23 protection, 264
voltage, 264 lead-chloride in, 84 retrieval, 265, 277
dipole-dipole array setup salt water ratio, 23 storage and handling, 83
SIP, 203 testing for faults, 84, 271 equipment checklist, sample, 309
directional antennas, 163 elevation, RXUPilot, 115 error
aiming with RXUPilot, 124 E-line Frequency Stepping Table, 196
disk space low, LED indication, 39 adjusting for difficulties, 257 Out of IR Range, 114
documentation, handheld terminals, 108 checklist, 272 phase shift, 61
driller’s mud, 264, 271 landmark alignment, 268 error, phase shift, 62
duration of soundings, 250 length, 256 errors
setup, 267 layout, 262
E Encryption Key, RXUPilot, 124 errors and warnings, LED indications, 39
editing spreadsheets, 51 ensuring quality data, 83 evaluating sites, 253
electric channels, setting up RXU-3E, 138 entering magnetic channels information, Ex, defined, 257
electric fences, 256 site setup, 282 Excel, 186
electrical characteristics, measuring, 270 entering survey information in site excess cable, 258
setup, 280 excitation loop, 77
entering telluric channels information, exploration, 3
site setup, 281 exporting data, 266
external connections, specifications, 301
Ey, defined, 257
F
F1 Menu key, 50
factors affecting radio frequency gain, setting, 286
communication, 166 derivation, 178 Generate Frequency Stepping Table
FAT, FAT16, FAT32, 32 ranges, 283 utility, 83
FCMX, 155, 196 ranges, specifications, 300 global positioning system, see GPS
fences, electric, 256 recommended frequencies (table), 179 GPS
FEND, 155 sampling, illustration, 283 antenna, connecting, 24
fields schedule files, 186 ensuring lock, 275
text, 51 setting, 186 handheld locator, 256
File close time, 82 significant digits, 178 LED indications, 36
file duration, 81 stepping pattern, 192 lock, defined, 264
file names, schedule files, 97, 187 frequency ranges testing receivers with landmarks, 84
filtering, 60 AMT and MT, 250 gradient array setup
filtering and noise, specifications, 300 specifications, 300 SIP, 205
format frequency stepping Graffiti, 108
CompactFlash card, 32 CSAMT, 225 keyboard instead of, 110
data records, 303 TDEM, 243 graphs, low pass filter, 61
format, date and time UTC, 288 Frequency Stepping Table grid, north reference, 281
formatting a CF card, 32 red highlight, 196 grid, survey, 252
FPOC, 155 frequency stepping, RXU-TM, 154
Freq statistic, RXUPilot, 128 frequency stepping, SIP setup, 211 H
FreqTabl.exe, 83 FRQ parameters, frequency Hand Era, 108
frequencies stepping, 155 HGNC, CMU-1 gain parameter, 156
valid and invalid, 196 FRQ0–FRQ9 in Auto-1 mode, 190 High frequency record start time, 288
high pass filter, 66
G Hx, Hy, Hz, defined, 260
gain margin, radio, 168
gain setting I
CMU-1, 100, 156 idling
MT, AMT, 55, 287 LED indications, 38
gain, adjusting, 227, 246 IERS, 178
317 Index 317

318 Index 318
iInverse array setup locking-ring connectors, handling, 18
SIP, 205 L longitude, RXUPilot, 115
incrementing the station position, 282 late time apparent resistivity (TDEM), long-term soundings, batteries, 33
induction loop, 259 equation, 234 loop orientation, TDEM, 233
Industrial, Scientific, and Medical latest detectable signal (table), loop, induction, 259
band, 160 TDEM, 235 low pass filter, 61
infrared port, 110 latest detectable signal, TDEM, 233 low pass filter graphs, 61
inserting rows in spreadsheets, 52 latitude, RXUPilot, 115 LP Filter, 61
installation time, 253 layout errors, correcting, 262
installing and connecting system layout sheet, sample, 305 M
components, 18 lead-chloride, 84, 256 magnetic declination
installing PC software, 10 leap seconds, 178 and site rotation, 258
installing whip antenna, 173 LED indications, 35–46 Internet resources, 298
instrument battery voltage warning, 39 magnetic signal, variation with
calibration, 255 calibration failure, 39 distance, 251
powering, 275 clock status, 41 magnetic vs. telluric deployments, 251
setting up, 275 CompactFlash not installed, 39 maintenance, equipment, 84
shutting down, 278 disk space low, 39 map
interface, V8, navigating, 46 examples, 43 topographical, 252
International Earth Rotation and mode, 41 map, time zone, 293
Reference Systems Service, 178 new sequence, 38–46 mast
interpreting data, 266 original sequence, 36 installing antenna, 172
inventory, equipment, 255 satellite lock, 40 masts and antennas, 162
IR port, 110 saturated records, 39 maximum current, CMU-1, 142
ISM, 160 summary, 42 Maximum Slaves, RXUPilot, 123
system error, 40 measuring
K using new sequence, 45 AC and DC potentials, 271
keyboard, instead of Graffiti, 110 Len/Area, TDEM, 239 electrical characteristics, 270
line frequency filter, 66 Meazura terminal, 108
loading setup or startup files, 53 documentation, 108
mechanical and environmental Next Site button, SIP, 209 stepping, 155
specifications, 302 noise, variation with distance, 251 path loss, radio, 167
meters, analog vs. digital, 263 noise, wind, 253, 259 pattern, frequency-stepping, 192
Microsoft™ Excel, 186 north reference, 280 PC requirements, 83
mode, LED indication, 41 Notepad, 186 PC software, installing, 10, 83
modes NTFS, 32 PDA, 108
automatic, 181 Number of Wnd, TDEM, 244 permissions, 253
changing, 210 phase, 178
Modifying calculated co-ordinates O leap seconds effect, 178
CSAMT, 223 obstructed dipole, 257 phase shift error, 61, 62
TDEM, 240 ohmmeter, analog, 263 Phse statistic, RXUPilot, 128
modifying calculated co-ordinates, omni-directional antenna installation ping, 165
SIP, 209 mast, 172 planning, 252
monitoring, 251 tripod, 170 polarity, in TDEM, 233
Mstr Rng/Brng, RXUPilot, 124 omni-directional antennas, 163 pole-dipole array setup
MSTRLAT, 164 operating and monitoring RXU-TM, 154 SIP, 203
MSTRLNG, 164 operating cost, 252 pole-pole array setup
MT operating RXU-3E, 139 SIP, 203
electrode connections, 21 operating temperature for power levels, radio, 166
MT techniques, 250 calibration, 72, 133, 143 power, specifications, 301
MTC-30 coil, 260 operations, common, 17 pre-amplifier orientation (air-loop), 261
MTC-50 coils, 250, 260, 286 orientation, sensor, 261 processing data, 266
Out of IR Range error, 114 productivity, 255
N output pulling, survey direction, 205
Network Addr, RXUPilot, 124 phase, 178 pushing, survey direction, 205
Network Status, RXUPilot, 123
network, radio, 159 P Q
Next Site button Palm OS, 108 quality control (quick start reference), 14
CSAMT, 223 PalmPilot, 108 quality data, ensuring, 83
TDEM, 240 parameter-based frequency quick start reference, 9–16
319 Index 319

320 Index 320
V8, 164 requirements, survey, 85
R Radio master latitude and longitude, resending results, radio network, 166
radio V8, 163 resistance
antenna, 162 Radio Network Address, 161 and low pass filter, 61
communication content and Radio Type, 160 measuring, 263
schedule, 164 Radio Unit Address, 161 reducing, 264
factors affecting communication, 166 Radio’s Transmit Power, 162 resistivity, apparent, filter roll-off, 61
gain margin, 168 rain resolution, specifications, 300
mast, 162 and instrument, 256 retrieving equipment, 277
operating RXU, 173 and sensors, 262 Rho statistic, RXUPilot, 128
operating V8, 174 ramp length, TDEM, 237 rolloff corner frequency, 196
path loss, 167 receiver gain, radio, 167 rolloff in apparent resistivity, 61
receiver gain, 167 receiver sensitivity, radio, 167 rotating the site, 258
receiver sensitivity, 167 recommended frequencies (table), 179 rows, spreadsheet, adding and
setting up communication, 169 record formats, 303 deleting, 52
system gain, 166 recordkeeping, 255 RQST parameter, RXU-TM, 154
transmitter gain, 167 red highlight, Frequency Stepping RXU radio, operating, 173
tripod assembly, 169 Table, 196 RXU-3E, 131
radio communication, 159 related products, specifications, 303 calibrating, 132
RXU-3E, 135 remote channels, acquiring with RXU- operating and monitoring, 139
RXU-TM, 150 3E, 136 remote channels, 136
setting up with RXUPilot, 122 remote reference, 251 setting up electric channels, 138
radio configurations, 160 remote site, distance, 251 shutting down, 132
Radio Encryption Key, 162 Remotes, network quality, RXUPilot, 125 starting, 132
radio master bearing and distance, repeating electrical measurements, 278
RXUPilot, 107, 111 RXU-TM, 141 schedule files
address, 114 AUTO parameter, 154 converting to binary format, 188
aiming directional antennas, 124 calibrating, 143 creating, 186
Ampl statistic, 128 frequency stepping, 154 examining, 189
continuous update, 128 operating and monitoring, 154 naming, 97, 187
controlling acquisition, 126 radio communication, 150 schedule, Auto-1 mode, 194
Encryption Key, 124 RQST parameter, 154 Schlumberger array setup
Freq statistic, 128 setting up, 151 SIP, 205
GPS, 115 scrolling statistics, RXUPilot
launching, 111 S RXUPilot
maximum slaves, 123 salt water ratio, 23, 268 scrolling statistics, 129
Mstr Rng/Brng, 124 sample rates, 284 selecting a frequency-stepping pattern,
Network Addr, 124 sampling parameters, 288 Auto-1 mode, 192
network status, 123 sampling rates, 285 sensitivity, CMU-1, 142
Phse statistic, 128 sampling, specifications, 300 sensors
radio communication, 122 satellite lock, LED indication, 40 AMTC-30, 250, 284, 286
remotes and network quality, 125 saturated records calibration, 255
Rho statistic, 128 cause, 257 checklist, 274
SnCh statistic, 128 saturated records, LED indication, 39 connecting, 273
station statistics, 127 Save command, 52 installing air-loop, 28
Time statistic, 128 saving data files, 81 installing horizontal, 27
Tx Power, 124 saving settings, 52 installing vertical, 27
updating display, 113 saving settings files, 53 MTC-50, 250, 286
saving startup files, 53 orientation, 261
scalar layout, CSAMT, 218 orienting, 27
schedule setting up, 273
equipment, 253 separate vs. shared electrodes, 20
separation, components, 260
setting acquisition times, 287
setting gain, 286
321 Index 321

322 Index 322
setting sampling parameters, 288 software, installing on PC, 10 startup, LED indications, 36, 38
setting up software, PC, 83 STARTUP.TBL
radio communication, 169 sounding, duration, 250 defined, 254
RXU-TM, CMU-1 and transmitter, 151 specifications static electricity and CF cards, 32
SIP acquisition, 202 channels, 300 station statistics, viewing with
setting up survey sites, 255 clocking and synchronization, 300 RXUPilot, 127
settings files, 53 data storage and transfer, 301 Statistics file log, 81
settings, saving, 52 external connections, 301 steps in a typical survey, 252
Setup.exe, 83 file types and logical record Stop Calibration, 80
shared vs. separate electrodes, 20 formats, 303 storage space required, 289
shutdown, LED indications, 38 filtering and noise, 300 storage, equipment, 83
shutting down an instrument, 278 mechanical and environmental, 302 summary, LED indications, 42
shutting down the RXU-3E, 132 power, 301 survey
shutting down the V8, 278 related products, 303 grid, 252
signal polarity in TDEM, 233 sample resolution, 300 requirements, 85
signal strength, AMT, 288 sampling, 300 site, setting up, 266
significant digits (specifying system, 299 typical steps, 252
frequencies), 178 specifying non-pattern frequencies, survey direction, pushing vs. pulling, 205
significant digits in auto modes, 178 Auto-1 mode, 191 Symbol Technologies, 108
SIP, 199 Spectral Induced Polarization, 199 Symbol terminal
acquiring data, 212 spreadsheet, 186 documentation, 108
changing location, 214 spreadsheets, editing, 51 synchronization, phase, 178
SIP acquisition, setting up, 202 S-shape, excess cable, 259 system error, LED indication, 40
site setup, MT/AMT, 279 Stack result file log, 81 system gain, radio, 166
sites, setting up, 255 stacked waveforms, 250
slope, 259 stacked waveforms, saving, 81 T
SnCh statistic, RXUPilot, 128 Standby mode, 285 TCP/IP, 160
TDEM, 231 Time statistic, RXUPilot, 128
channel spreadsheet, 238 time to install, 253 V
depth of investigation, 235 time zone map, 293 V5-2000 sampling schedule, MTU, 285
late time apparent resistivity, topographical map, 252 V8
equation, 234 toxic material (electrodes), 84 navigating the user interface, 46
latest detectable signal, 233 TPFR, 155 radio, operating, 174
Len/Area, 239 TPFR in Auto-1 mode, 194 V8-EX
loop orientation, 233 traffic and data quality, 260 changing battery, 34
Number of Wnd, 244 Transient Electromagnetics, 231 connecting, 34
polarity correction, 244 transmitted LF current, 196 vector layout, CSAMT, 218
polarity of signal, 233 transmitter verifying location, 266
ramp length, 237 setting up, 151 vertical coil, 260
setting up, 235 transmitter gain, radio, 167 VLF filter, 61
Tx Loop Length, 238 trigonometry, 259 voltage, dipole, 264
Tx Loop Turns, 237 tripod, assembling, 169 voltmeter, digital, 263
TDMA, 160 TTOT, 155
techniques TTOT in Auto-1 mode, 194 W
MT and AMT, 250 Tx Loop Length, TDEM, 238 waveform
telluric lines, setting up, 256 Tx Loop Turns, TDEM, 237 bipolar, 183
telluric vs. magnetic deployments, 251 Tx Power, RXUPilot, 124 code, 186
TEM, 231 phase, 178
temperature and calibration, 72, 133, 143 U unipolar, 184
testing electrodes, 84 unipolar waveforms, 184 Waveform file log, 81
text, typing, 51 unit Address, RXUPilot, 123 waveforms, stacked, 250
Tikhonov, 7 Update cell, box spreadsheet, 165 Wenner array setup
Time Domain Electromagnetics, 231 user interface, V8, navigating, 46 SIP, 205
time format, 288 UTC, 115 WFRM, 155
time series, saving, 81 UTC, format, 288 whip antenna
time slot, 283 installing, 173
Time slot length, 289 whip antennas, 163
323 Index 323

324 Index 324
wind noise, 259

System 2000.net V8&RXU v.3.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

System 2000.net V8&RXU v.3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System 2000.

This User Guide was created in Adobe FrameMaker 7.0.

Copyright 2006 Phoenix Geophysics Limited.

All rights reserved. No part of this Guide may be reproduced or

Phoenix Geophysics Limited, 3781 Victoria Park Avenue, Unit 3,

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

V8 Multi-Function Receiver, V5 System 2000, System2000.net,

Chapter 2: Quick Start Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 5: RXUPilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 7: The RXU-TM Transmitter Monitor and CMU-1

Chapter 9: Frequency Stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 11: Controlled Source AMT (CSAMT) . . . . . . . 217

Chapter 13: Magnetotellurics (MT) and

Acquiring MT/AMT data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Appendix A: Time Zone Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Appendix B: Magnetic Declination Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Appendix E: Sample Equipment Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Appendix F: Meazura Quick Start Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

3 Chapter 1 Introduction About System 2000.net™ 3

V8-3E, -3ER 2 3 — SIP. V8-EX not supported.

V8-7E, -7ER 4 7 — Small-scale dipole-dipole IP. Requires V8-EX or multi-

V8-8, -8R 4 7 3 Same as V8-7E, plus CSAMT.

RXU-3E, -3ER 2 3 — CSAMT, SIP.

RXU-3, -3R 2 — 1 Time Domain EM.

RXU-TM, -TMR — — — All controlled-source applications. Monitors, controls,

RXU-TC, -TCR — — — Transmitter controller for controlled-source applications

a. An “R” appended to the model number indicates radio communication capability.

5 Chapter 1 Introduction About System 2000.net™ 5

7 Chapter 1 Introduction Phoenix System 2000.net advantages 7

How to get further Telephone: +1 (416) 491-7340

Phoenix Geophysics Ltd.

Quick Start Reference

Before you begin Installing the PC software

Install the necessary Phoenix software on your PC MT and AMT SSMT2000*

11 Chapter 2 Quick Start Calibrate equipment 11

Step 3: Create and install Step 4: Transport equipment

For instructions on setting up the RXU-TM, see Chapter

Note The CMU-1 current monitor measures current at a part

Open the Site Setup dialog box for the geophysical

13 Chapter 2 Quick Start Set up remote instruments 13

If you are using radio communication, check the

15 Chapter 2 Quick Start Move to the next site 15

Instructions are provided for:

Installing and connecting Connection of radio antennas is described in Chapter 8,

All instruments require these connections: Handling locking-ring connectors

Fig. 3-2: GPS and Battery connectors.

To remove a protective cap:

19 Chapter 3 Common Operations Installing and connecting system components 19

It is important that the instrument be grounded before

Note A single electrode can not be shared by two

To connect electrodes for MT/AMT:

21 Chapter 3 Common Operations Installing and connecting system components 21

Warning To prevent damage to the instrument, always

Fig. 3-8: Cable threaded through the instrument terminal shaft.

5. Tighten the binding post nut securely.

Fig. 3-7: An electrode cable stripped and wrapped with

3. Unscrew the binding post nut on the instrument

Fig. 3-9: Electrode installation.

23 Chapter 3 Common Operations Installing and connecting system components 23

Tip Other than in monitoring applications, cable splices will

Magnetic sensors can be connected individually to the

25 Chapter 3 Common Operations Installing and connecting system components 25

To position and orient a horizontal coil sensor: